* NEWS: Mention new feature --exclude-modules-for-implib.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
e7fc76dd 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 5@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 6@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
7@include configdoc.texi
8@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 9@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 10@c man end
252b5132
RH
11
12@c @smallbook
13
ff5dcc92
SC
14@macro gcctabopt{body}
15@code{\body\}
16@end macro
17
0285c67d
NC
18@c man begin NAME
19@ifset man
20@c Configure for the generation of man pages
21@set UsesEnvVars
22@set GENERIC
0285c67d 23@set ARM
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
3c3bdf30 29@set MMIX
2469cfa2 30@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
31@set POWERPC
32@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
33@set Renesas
34@set SPU
35@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 36@set WIN32
e0001a05 37@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
38@end ifset
39@c man end
40
252b5132
RH
41@ifinfo
42@format
43START-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
44* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
45END-INFO-DIR-ENTRY
46@end format
47@end ifinfo
48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
0e9517a9 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000,
793c5807 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9c8ebd6a 94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 2000, 2001,
793c5807 952002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
143@ifset HPPA
144* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
145@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
146@ifset M68HC11
147* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
152@ifset POWERPC
153* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
154@end ifset
155@ifset POWERPC64
156* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
158@ifset SPU
159* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
160@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
161@ifset TICOFF
162* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
163@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
164@ifset WIN32
165* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
166@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
167@ifset XTENSA
168* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
169@end ifset
252b5132
RH
170@end ifclear
171@ifclear SingleFormat
172* BFD:: BFD
173@end ifclear
174@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
175
176* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
177* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 178* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 179* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 180@end menu
84ec0e6d 181@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
182
183@node Overview
184@chapter Overview
185
186@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
187@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 188
0879a67a 189@ifset man
0285c67d 190@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 191ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
192@c man end
193
194@c man begin SEEALSO
195ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
196the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
197@file{ld}.
198@c man end
199@end ifset
200
201@c man begin DESCRIPTION
202
ff5dcc92 203@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 204their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 205compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 206
ff5dcc92 207@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
208a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
209to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
210
0285c67d
NC
211@ifset man
212@c For the man only
ece2d90e 213This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
214@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
215language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
216@end ifset
217
252b5132 218@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
219This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
220to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
221write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
222@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
223available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
224@end ifclear
225
226Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
227linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
228execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 229@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
230(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
231
0285c67d
NC
232@c man end
233
252b5132
RH
234@node Invocation
235@chapter Invocation
236
0285c67d
NC
237@c man begin DESCRIPTION
238
ff5dcc92 239The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
240and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
241you have many choices to control its behavior.
242
0285c67d
NC
243@c man end
244
252b5132
RH
245@ifset UsesEnvVars
246@menu
247* Options:: Command Line Options
248* Environment:: Environment Variables
249@end menu
250
251@node Options
252@section Command Line Options
253@end ifset
254
255@cindex command line
256@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
257
258@c man begin OPTIONS
259
252b5132
RH
260The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
261practice few of them are used in any particular context.
262@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 263For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
264object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
265link a file @code{hello.o}:
266
267@smallexample
268ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
269@end smallexample
270
ff5dcc92 271This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
272result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
273the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
274directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
275
ff5dcc92 276Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
277point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
278as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
279which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
280files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
281different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
282occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
283option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
284noted in the descriptions below.
285
286@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
287Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
288together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
289options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
290an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
291
292Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
293specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
294and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
295are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
296message @samp{No input files}.
297
36f63dca 298If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
299assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
300augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
301linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
302permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
303or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
304@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
305script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
306extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
307to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
308the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
309
310For options whose names are a single letter,
311option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
312whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
313option that requires them.
314
315For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 316precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 317@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 318this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 319only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
320@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
321name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
322output.
323
324Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
325option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
326immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
327@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
328Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
329accepted.
252b5132 330
36f63dca
NC
331Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
332(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
333prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
334compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
335
336@smallexample
337 gcc -Wl,--startgroup foo.o bar.o -Wl,--endgroup
338@end smallexample
339
340This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
341silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link.
342
343Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
344linker:
345
ff5dcc92 346@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 347@include at-file.texi
dff70155 348
252b5132
RH
349@kindex -a@var{keyword}
350@item -a@var{keyword}
351This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
352argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
353@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
354@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
355to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
356
357@ifset I960
358@cindex architectures
359@kindex -A@var{arch}
360@item -A@var{architecture}
361@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
362@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
363In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
364Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
365@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
366the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 367archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
368family}, for details.
369
ff5dcc92 370Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
371other architecture families.
372@end ifset
373
374@ifclear SingleFormat
375@cindex binary input format
376@kindex -b @var{format}
377@kindex --format=@var{format}
378@cindex input format
379@cindex input format
380@item -b @var{input-format}
381@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
382@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
383file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 384@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 385that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 386configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 387to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
388default input format the most usual format on each machine.
389@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
390supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
391formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
392@xref{BFD}.
393
394You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
395binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
396linking object files of different formats), by including
397@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 398particular format.
252b5132
RH
399
400The default format is taken from the environment variable
401@code{GNUTARGET}.
402@ifset UsesEnvVars
403@xref{Environment}.
404@end ifset
405You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
406@code{TARGET};
407@ifclear man
408see @ref{Format Commands}.
409@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
410@end ifclear
411
412@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
413@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
414@cindex compatibility, MRI
415@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
416@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 417For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 418files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
419@ifclear man
420@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
421@end ifclear
422@ifset man
423the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
424@end ifset
425Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 426the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
427scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
428If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
429specified by any @samp{-L} options.
430
431@cindex common allocation
432@kindex -d
433@kindex -dc
434@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 435@item -d
252b5132
RH
436@itemx -dc
437@itemx -dp
438These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
439compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
440even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
441script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
442@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
443
444@cindex entry point, from command line
445@kindex -e @var{entry}
446@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 447@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
448@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
449Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
450program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
451named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
452and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
453base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
454@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
455and other ways of specifying the entry point.
456
b58f81ae
DJ
457@kindex --exclude-libs
458@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
459Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 460exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
461@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
462automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
463port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
464explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
465option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
466be treated as hidden.
467
e1c37eb5
DK
468@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
469@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
470Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
471should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
472into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
473may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
474used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
475the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
476match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
477command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
478of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
479regardless of this option.
480
252b5132
RH
481@cindex dynamic symbol table
482@kindex -E
483@kindex --export-dynamic
484@item -E
485@itemx --export-dynamic
486When creating a dynamically linked executable, add all symbols to the
487dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the set of symbols
488which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
489
490If you do not use this option, the dynamic symbol table will normally
491contain only those symbols which are referenced by some dynamic object
492mentioned in the link.
493
494If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
495back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
496dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
497linking the program itself.
498
55255dae 499You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 500be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 501See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 502
36f63dca 503@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
504@cindex big-endian objects
505@cindex endianness
506@kindex -EB
507@item -EB
508Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
509
510@cindex little-endian objects
511@kindex -EL
512@item -EL
513Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 514@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
515
516@kindex -f
517@kindex --auxiliary
518@item -f
519@itemx --auxiliary @var{name}
520When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
521to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
522table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
523symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
524
525If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
526run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
527the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
528first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
529@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
530in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
531Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
532implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
533machine specific performance.
534
535This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
536will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
537
538@kindex -F
539@kindex --filter
540@item -F @var{name}
541@itemx --filter @var{name}
542When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
543the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
544of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
545on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
546
547If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
548run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
549dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
550filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
551found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
552used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
553@var{name}.
554
ff5dcc92 555Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 556toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
557object files.
558@ifclear SingleFormat
559The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 560@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 561@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
562environment variable.
563@end ifclear
564The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
565creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 566
3dbf70a2
MM
567@cindex finalization function
568@kindex -fini
569@item -fini @var{name}
570When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
571executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
572address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
573the function to call.
574
252b5132
RH
575@kindex -g
576@item -g
577Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
578
579@kindex -G
580@kindex --gpsize
581@cindex object size
582@item -G@var{value}
583@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
584Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
585@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
586MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
587sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
588
589@cindex runtime library name
590@kindex -h@var{name}
591@kindex -soname=@var{name}
592@item -h@var{name}
593@itemx -soname=@var{name}
594When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
595the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
596which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
597linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
598field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
599
600@kindex -i
601@cindex incremental link
602@item -i
603Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
604
3dbf70a2
MM
605@cindex initialization function
606@kindex -init
607@item -init @var{name}
608When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
609executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
610of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
611function to call.
612
252b5132 613@cindex archive files, from cmd line
bcb674cf
RS
614@kindex -l@var{namespec}
615@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
616@item -l@var{namespec}
617@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
618Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
619list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
620If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
621will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherise it
622will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 623
ff5dcc92 624On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
625files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
626and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
627called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
628@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
629indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
630to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
631@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
632
633The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
634specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
635was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
636command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
637archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
638the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
639
ff5dcc92 640See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
641archives multiple times.
642
643You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
644
645@ifset GENERIC
646This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 647if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
648behaviour of the AIX linker.
649@end ifset
650
651@cindex search directory, from cmd line
652@kindex -L@var{dir}
653@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
a1ab1d2a 654@item -L@var{searchdir}
252b5132 655@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
656Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
657for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
658option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
659in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
660on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 661@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
252b5132
RH
662order in which the options appear.
663
9c8ebd6a
DJ
664If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
665by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
666
252b5132
RH
667@ifset UsesEnvVars
668The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 669@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
670some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
671@end ifset
672
673The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
674@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
675at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
676
677@cindex emulation
678@kindex -m @var{emulation}
679@item -m@var{emulation}
680Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
681emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
682
683If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
684@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
685
686Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
687configured.
688
689@cindex link map
690@kindex -M
691@kindex --print-map
692@item -M
693@itemx --print-map
694Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
695information about the link, including the following:
696
697@itemize @bullet
698@item
3b83e13a 699Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
700@item
701How common symbols are allocated.
702@item
703All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
704which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
705@item
706The values assigned to symbols.
707
708Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
709involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
710have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
711linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
712of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
713the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
714linker script containing:
715
716@smallexample
717 foo = 1
718 foo = foo * 4
719 foo = foo + 8
720@end smallexample
721
722will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
723option is used:
724
725@smallexample
726 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
727 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
728 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
729@end smallexample
730
731See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
732scripts.
252b5132
RH
733@end itemize
734
735@kindex -n
736@cindex read-only text
737@cindex NMAGIC
738@kindex --nmagic
739@item -n
740@itemx --nmagic
fa19fce0 741Turn off page alignment of sections, and mark the output as
a1ab1d2a 742@code{NMAGIC} if possible.
252b5132
RH
743
744@kindex -N
745@kindex --omagic
746@cindex read/write from cmd line
747@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 748@item -N
252b5132
RH
749@itemx --omagic
750Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
751not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
752libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
753mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
754is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
755specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
756
757@kindex --no-omagic
758@cindex OMAGIC
759@item --no-omagic
760This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
761sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
762be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
763shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
764
765@kindex -o @var{output}
766@kindex --output=@var{output}
767@cindex naming the output file
768@item -o @var{output}
769@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 770Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
771option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
772script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
773
774@kindex -O @var{level}
775@cindex generating optimized output
776@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 777If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 778the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
779should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
780option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
781the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
782no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
783of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 784
a712da20
NC
785@kindex -q
786@kindex --emit-relocs
787@cindex retain relocations in final executable
788@item -q
789@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 790Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
791Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
792order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
793in larger executables.
794
dbab7a7b
NC
795This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
796
4f471f39
RS
797@kindex --force-dynamic
798@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
799@item --force-dynamic
800Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
801to VxWorks targets.
802
252b5132
RH
803@cindex partial link
804@cindex relocatable output
805@kindex -r
1049f94e 806@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 807@item -r
1049f94e 808@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 809Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 810turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
811linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
812magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
813@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 814@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
815If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
816linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
817constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
818
62bf86b4
HPN
819When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
820partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
821relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
822example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
823with input files in other formats at all.
824
252b5132
RH
825This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
826
827@kindex -R @var{file}
828@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
829@cindex symbol-only input
830@item -R @var{filename}
831@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
832Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
833relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
834to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
835programs. You may use this option more than once.
836
ff5dcc92 837For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 838followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 839the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
840
841@kindex -s
842@kindex --strip-all
843@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 844@item -s
252b5132
RH
845@itemx --strip-all
846Omit all symbol information from the output file.
847
848@kindex -S
849@kindex --strip-debug
850@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 851@item -S
252b5132
RH
852@itemx --strip-debug
853Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
854
855@kindex -t
856@kindex --trace
857@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 858@item -t
252b5132 859@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 860Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
861
862@kindex -T @var{script}
863@kindex --script=@var{script}
864@cindex script files
865@item -T @var{scriptfile}
866@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
867Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 868@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 869@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
870output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
871the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
872specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
873options accumulate.
252b5132 874
14be8564
L
875@kindex -dT @var{script}
876@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
877@cindex script files
878@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
879@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
880Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
881
882This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
883processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
884command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
885@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
886behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
887command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
888the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
889@samp{gcc}).
890
252b5132
RH
891@kindex -u @var{symbol}
892@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
893@cindex undefined symbol
894@item -u @var{symbol}
895@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
896Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
897symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
898modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
899different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
900option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
901
902@kindex -Ur
903@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 904@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
905For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
906@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 907turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
908@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
909It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
910with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
911be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
912@samp{-r} for the others.
913
577a0623
AM
914@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
915@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
916Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
917@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
918missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
919specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
920multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
921input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
922in a linker script.
a854a4a7 923
252b5132
RH
924@kindex -v
925@kindex -V
926@kindex --version
927@cindex version
928@item -v
929@itemx --version
930@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 931Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
932lists the supported emulations.
933
934@kindex -x
935@kindex --discard-all
936@cindex deleting local symbols
937@item -x
938@itemx --discard-all
939Delete all local symbols.
940
941@kindex -X
942@kindex --discard-locals
943@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 944@item -X
252b5132 945@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
946Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
947system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
948or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
949
950@kindex -y @var{symbol}
951@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
952@cindex symbol tracing
953@item -y @var{symbol}
954@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
955Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
956option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
957to prepend an underscore.
958
959This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
960don't know where the reference is coming from.
961
962@kindex -Y @var{path}
963@item -Y @var{path}
964Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
965for Solaris compatibility.
966
967@kindex -z @var{keyword}
968@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
969The recognized keywords are:
970@table @samp
971
972@item combreloc
973Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
974lookup caching possible.
975
976@item defs
560e09e9 977Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 978shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 979
6aa29e7b
JJ
980@item execstack
981Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
982
cd6d6c15
NC
983@item initfirst
984This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
985It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
986before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
987the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
988the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
989objects.
990
991@item interpose
992Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
993but the primary executable.
994
5fa222e4
AM
995@item lazy
996When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
997dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
998the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
999Lazy binding is the default.
1000
cd6d6c15
NC
1001@item loadfltr
1002Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1003runtime.
1004
1005@item muldefs
1006Allows multiple definitions.
1007
1008@item nocombreloc
1009Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1010
1011@item nocopyreloc
1012Disables production of copy relocs.
1013
1014@item nodefaultlib
1015Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1016ignore any default library search paths.
1017
1018@item nodelete
1019Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1020
1021@item nodlopen
1022Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1023
1024@item nodump
1025Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1026
6aa29e7b
JJ
1027@item noexecstack
1028Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1029
1030@item norelro
1031Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1032
cd6d6c15
NC
1033@item now
1034When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1035dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1036when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1037deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1038first called.
1039
1040@item origin
1041Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1042
6aa29e7b
JJ
1043@item relro
1044Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1045
24718e3b
L
1046@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1047Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1048
1049@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1050Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1051
cd6d6c15
NC
1052@end table
1053
ece2d90e 1054Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1055
1056@kindex -(
1057@cindex groups of archives
1058@item -( @var{archives} -)
1059@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1060The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1061either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1062
1063The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1064references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1065the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1066archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1067object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1068would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1069they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1070resolved.
1071
1072Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1073it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1074more archives.
1075
69da35b5
NC
1076@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1077@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1078@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1079@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1080Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1081recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1082and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1083the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1084behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1085so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1086restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1087
4a43e768
AM
1088@kindex --as-needed
1089@kindex --no-as-needed
1090@item --as-needed
1091@itemx --no-as-needed
1092This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1093on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally,
1094the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1095on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
77cfaee6
AM
1096needed. @option{--as-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags to only be emitted
1097for libraries that satisfy some symbol reference from regular objects
1098which is undefined at the point that the library was linked.
4a43e768
AM
1099@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1100
e56f61be
L
1101@kindex --add-needed
1102@kindex --no-add-needed
1103@item --add-needed
1104@itemx --no-add-needed
1105This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries from ELF
1106DT_NEEDED tags in dynamic libraries mentioned on the command line after
1107the @option{--no-add-needed} option. Normally, the linker will add
1108a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library from DT_NEEDED tags.
1109@option{--no-add-needed} causes DT_NEEDED tags will never be emitted
1110for those libraries from DT_NEEDED tags. @option{--add-needed} restores
1111the default behaviour.
1112
252b5132
RH
1113@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1114@item -assert @var{keyword}
1115This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1116
1117@kindex -Bdynamic
1118@kindex -dy
1119@kindex -call_shared
1120@item -Bdynamic
1121@itemx -dy
1122@itemx -call_shared
1123Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1124for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1125default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1126for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1127multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1128@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1129
a1ab1d2a
UD
1130@kindex -Bgroup
1131@item -Bgroup
1132Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1133section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1134object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1135@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1136only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1137
252b5132
RH
1138@kindex -Bstatic
1139@kindex -dn
1140@kindex -non_shared
1141@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1142@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1143@itemx -dn
1144@itemx -non_shared
1145@itemx -static
1146Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1147platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1148variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1149may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1150library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1151option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1152option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1153shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1154references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1155libraries.
252b5132
RH
1156
1157@kindex -Bsymbolic
1158@item -Bsymbolic
1159When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1160definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1161for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1162within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1163platforms which support shared libraries.
1164
40b36307
L
1165@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1166@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1167When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1168symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1169This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1170libraries.
1171
55255dae
L
1172@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1173@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1174Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1175typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1176global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1177within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1178to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1179in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1180which support shared libraries.
1181
1182The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1183scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1184
40b36307
L
1185@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1186@item --dynamic-list-data
1187Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1188
1189@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1190@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1191Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1192is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1193
0b8a70d9
L
1194@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1195@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1196Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1197
252b5132
RH
1198@kindex --check-sections
1199@kindex --no-check-sections
1200@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1201@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1202Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1203been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1204perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1205suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1206allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1207restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
252b5132
RH
1208
1209@cindex cross reference table
1210@kindex --cref
1211@item --cref
1212Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1213generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1214Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1215
1216The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1217easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1218sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1219symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1220definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1221
4818e05f
AM
1222@cindex common allocation
1223@kindex --no-define-common
1224@item --no-define-common
1225This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1226The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1227@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1228
1229The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1230the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1231of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1232forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1233Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1234from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1235This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1236and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1237duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1238paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@cindex symbols, from command line
1241@kindex --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1242@item --defsym @var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1243Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1244address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1245times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1246limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1247context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1248symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1249constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1250using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1251Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1252space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1253@var{expression}.
1254
1255@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1256@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1257@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1258@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1259@itemx --no-demangle
1260These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1261and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1262present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1263underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1264mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1265different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1266to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1267demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1268is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1269
1270@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1271@kindex -I@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1272@kindex --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1273@item --dynamic-linker @var{file}
1274Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1275generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1276linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1277doing.
1278
7ce691ae 1279@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1280@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1281@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1282@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1283Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1284with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1285
252b5132
RH
1286@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1287@item --force-exe-suffix
1288Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1289
1290If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1291@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1292the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1293option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1294Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1295it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1296
1297@kindex --gc-sections
1298@kindex --no-gc-sections
1299@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1300@item --gc-sections
1301@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1302Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1303targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1304performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1305@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1306
d5465ba2
AM
1307@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1308examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1309symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1310command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1311referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1312libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1313referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1314the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1315relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1316
ac69cbc6
TG
1317This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1318@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitely
1319specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1320a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1321
c17d87de
NC
1322@kindex --print-gc-sections
1323@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1324@cindex garbage collection
1325@item --print-gc-sections
1326@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1327List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1328printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1329collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1330default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1331be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1332line.
1333
252b5132
RH
1334@cindex help
1335@cindex usage
1336@kindex --help
1337@item --help
1338Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1339
ea20a7da
CC
1340@kindex --target-help
1341@item --target-help
1342Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1343
252b5132
RH
1344@kindex -Map
1345@item -Map @var{mapfile}
1346Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1347@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1348
1349@cindex memory usage
1350@kindex --no-keep-memory
1351@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1352@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1353symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1354instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1355necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1356while linking a large executable.
1357
1358@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1359@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1360@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1361@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1362Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1363is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1364The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1365behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1366libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1367
aa713662
L
1368@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1369@kindex -z muldefs
1370@item --allow-multiple-definition
1371@itemx -z muldefs
1372Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1373report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1374first definition will be used.
1375
b79e8c78 1376@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1377@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1378@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1379@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
560e09e9
NC
1380Allows (the default) or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1381This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1382determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1383shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1384how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1385
1386The reason that @option{--allow-shlib-undefined} is the default is that
1387the shared library being specified at link time may not be the same as
1388the one that is available at load time, so the symbols might actually be
ae9a127f 1389resolvable at load time. Plus there are some systems, (eg BeOS) where
560e09e9 1390undefined symbols in shared libraries is normal. (The kernel patches
ece2d90e 1391them at load time to select which function is most appropriate
560e09e9
NC
1392for the current architecture. This is used for example to dynamically
1393select an appropriate memset function). Apparently it is also normal
1394for HPPA shared libraries to have undefined symbols.
b79e8c78 1395
31941635
L
1396@kindex --no-undefined-version
1397@item --no-undefined-version
1398Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1399it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1400will be issued instead.
1401
3e3b46e5
PB
1402@kindex --default-symver
1403@item --default-symver
1404Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1405exported symbols.
1406
1407@kindex --default-imported-symver
1408@item --default-imported-symver
1409Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1410imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1411
252b5132
RH
1412@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1413@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1414Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1415files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1416been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1417This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1418errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1419have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1420inappropriate.
1421
fe7929ce
AM
1422@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1423@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1424Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1425library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1426
252b5132
RH
1427@kindex --no-whole-archive
1428@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1429Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1430archive files.
1431
1432@cindex output file after errors
1433@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1434@item --noinhibit-exec
1435Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1436Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1437errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1438when it issues any error whatsoever.
1439
0a9c1c8e
CD
1440@kindex -nostdlib
1441@item -nostdlib
1442Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1443command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1444(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1445
252b5132
RH
1446@ifclear SingleFormat
1447@kindex --oformat
1448@item --oformat @var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1449@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1450file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1451@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1452object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1453object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1454should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1455usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1456name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1457list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1458command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1459this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1460@end ifclear
1461
36af4a4e
JJ
1462@kindex -pie
1463@kindex --pic-executable
1464@item -pie
1465@itemx --pic-executable
1466@cindex position independent executables
1467Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1468ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1469libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1470address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1471normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1472defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1473
252b5132
RH
1474@kindex -qmagic
1475@item -qmagic
1476This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1477
1478@kindex -Qy
1479@item -Qy
1480This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1481
1482@kindex --relax
1483@cindex synthesizing linker
1484@cindex relaxing addressing modes
1485@item --relax
a1ab1d2a 1486An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1487@ifset GENERIC
1488This option is only supported on a few targets.
1489@end ifset
1490@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1491@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1492@end ifset
1493@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1494@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1495@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1496@ifset XTENSA
1497@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1498@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1499@ifset M68HC11
1500@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1501@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1502@ifset POWERPC
1503@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1504@end ifset
252b5132
RH
1505
1506On some platforms, the @samp{--relax} option performs global
1507optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves addressing
1508in the program, such as relaxing address modes and synthesizing new
1509instructions in the output object file.
1510
1511On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1512debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1513@ifset GENERIC
1514This is known to be
1515the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300 family of processors.
1516@end ifset
1517
1518@ifset GENERIC
1519On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1520but ignored.
1521@end ifset
1522
1523@cindex retaining specified symbols
1524@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1525@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1526@item --retain-symbols-file @var{filename}
1527Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1528discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1529symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1530@ifset GENERIC
1531(such as VxWorks)
1532@end ifset
1533where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1534run-time memory.
1535
1536@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1537or symbols needed for relocations.
1538
1539You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1540line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1541
1542@ifset GENERIC
1543@item -rpath @var{dir}
1544@cindex runtime library search path
1545@kindex -rpath
1546Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1547linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1548arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1549them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1550also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1551objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1552@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1553ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1554@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1555
ff5dcc92 1556The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1557SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1558@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1559runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1560options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1561gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1562file systems.
252b5132 1563
ff5dcc92 1564For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1565followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1566the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1567@end ifset
1568
1569@ifset GENERIC
1570@cindex link-time runtime library search path
1571@kindex -rpath-link
1572@item -rpath-link @var{DIR}
1573When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1574happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1575of the input files.
1576
1577When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1578non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1579shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1580explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1581specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1582@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1583either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1584appearing multiple times.
1585
28c309a2
NC
1586This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1587that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1588is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1589runtime linker would do.
1590
252b5132 1591The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1592libraries:
252b5132
RH
1593@enumerate
1594@item
ff5dcc92 1595Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1596@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1597Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1598between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1599specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1600used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1601at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1602by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1603the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1604@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1605On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1606@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1607environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1608@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1609On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1610directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1611@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1612For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1613variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1614@item
ec4eb78a
L
1615For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1616@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1617libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1618@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1619@item
252b5132
RH
1620The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1621@item
1622For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1623exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1624@end enumerate
1625
1626If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1627warning and continue with the link.
1628@end ifset
1629
1630@kindex -shared
1631@kindex -Bshareable
1632@item -shared
1633@itemx -Bshareable
1634@cindex shared libraries
1635Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1636and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1637shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1638undefined symbols in the link.
1639
de7dd2bd 1640@item --sort-common [= ascending | descending]
252b5132 1641@kindex --sort-common
de7dd2bd
NC
1642This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1643ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1644sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1645eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1646between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1647specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1648
bcaa7b3e
L
1649@kindex --sort-section name
1650@item --sort-section name
1651This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1652patterns in the linker script.
1653
1654@kindex --sort-section alignment
1655@item --sort-section alignment
1656This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1657patterns in the linker script.
1658
252b5132 1659@kindex --split-by-file
a854a4a7 1660@item --split-by-file [@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1661Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1662each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1663size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1664
1665@kindex --split-by-reloc
a854a4a7
AM
1666@item --split-by-reloc [@var{count}]
1667Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1668output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1669This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1670certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1671cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1672that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1673support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1674input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1675more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1676many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1677
1678@kindex --stats
1679@item --stats
1680Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1681as execution time and memory usage.
1682
e2243057
RS
1683@kindex --sysroot
1684@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1685Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1686configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1687that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1688
252b5132
RH
1689@kindex --traditional-format
1690@cindex traditional format
1691@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1692For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1693the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1694use the traditional format instead.
1695
1696@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1697For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1698symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1699full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1700@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1701trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1702combine duplicate entries.
1703
176355da
NC
1704@kindex --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1705@item --section-start @var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1706Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1707address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1708times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1709line.
1710@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1711for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1712@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1713should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1714sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1715
252b5132
RH
1716@kindex -Tbss @var{org}
1717@kindex -Tdata @var{org}
1718@kindex -Ttext @var{org}
1719@cindex segment origins, cmd line
1720@item -Tbss @var{org}
1721@itemx -Tdata @var{org}
1722@itemx -Ttext @var{org}
a6e02871
AO
1723Same as --section-start, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
1724@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1725
560e09e9
NC
1726@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1727@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1728Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1729values for @samp{method}:
1730
1731@table @samp
1732@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1733Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1734
1735@item report-all
da8bce14 1736Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1737
1738@item ignore-in-object-files
1739Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1740ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1741
1742@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1743Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1744ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1745when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1746libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1747command line.
1748@end table
1749
1750The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1751by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1752
1753Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1754unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1755can change this to a warning.
1756
252b5132
RH
1757@kindex --verbose
1758@cindex verbose
1759@item --dll-verbose
308b1ffd 1760@itemx --verbose
ff5dcc92 1761Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1762supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
b9a8de1e 1763the linker script being used by the linker.
252b5132
RH
1764
1765@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1766@cindex version script, symbol versions
1767@itemx --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1768Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1769used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1770about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
252b5132
RH
1771is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1772@xref{VERSION}.
1773
7ce691ae 1774@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1775@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1776@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1777@item --warn-common
1778Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1779a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1780but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1781you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1782Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1783warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1784
1785There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1786
1787@table @samp
1788@item int i = 1;
1789A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1790file.
1791
1792@item extern int i;
1793An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1794There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1795variable somewhere.
1796
1797@item int i;
1798A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1799variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1800The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1801single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1802size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1803a definition of the same variable.
1804@end table
1805
1806The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1807Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1808just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1809encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1810a common symbol.
1811
1812@enumerate
1813@item
1814Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1815definition for the symbol.
1816@smallexample
1817@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1818 overridden by definition
1819@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1820@end smallexample
1821
1822@item
1823Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1824the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1825except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1826@smallexample
1827@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1828 overriding common
1829@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1830@end smallexample
1831
1832@item
1833Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1834@smallexample
1835@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1836 of `@var{symbol}'
1837@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1838@end smallexample
1839
1840@item
1841Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1842@smallexample
1843@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1844 overridden by larger common
1845@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1846@end smallexample
1847
1848@item
1849Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1850the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1851encountered in a different order.
1852@smallexample
1853@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1854 overriding smaller common
1855@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1856@end smallexample
1857@end enumerate
1858
1859@kindex --warn-constructors
1860@item --warn-constructors
1861Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1862object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1863detect the use of global constructors.
1864
1865@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1866@item --warn-multiple-gp
1867Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1868This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1869Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1870section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1871of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1872base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1873base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1874bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1875large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1876values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1877option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1878
1879@kindex --warn-once
1880@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1881@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1882@item --warn-once
1883Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1884which refers to it.
1885
1886@kindex --warn-section-align
1887@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1888@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1889@item --warn-section-align
1890Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1891alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1892The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1893is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1894the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1895
8fdd7217
NC
1896@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1897@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1898Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 1899
560e09e9
NC
1900@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
1901@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
1902If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
1903@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
1904This option makes it generate a warning instead.
1905
1906@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
1907@item --error-unresolved-symbols
1908This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
1909it is reporting unresolved symbols.
1910
252b5132
RH
1911@kindex --whole-archive
1912@cindex including an entire archive
1913@item --whole-archive
1914For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 1915@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
1916in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
1917files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
1918library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
1919library. This option may be used more than once.
1920
7ec229ce 1921Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
1922about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
1923Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
1924list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
1925your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
1926
252b5132
RH
1927@kindex --wrap
1928@item --wrap @var{symbol}
1929Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
1930@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
1931undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
1932@var{symbol}.
1933
1934This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
1935wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
1936wishes to call the system function, it should call
1937@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
1938
1939Here is a trivial example:
1940
1941@smallexample
1942void *
cc2f008e 1943__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 1944@{
cc2f008e 1945 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
1946 return __real_malloc (c);
1947@}
1948@end smallexample
1949
ff5dcc92 1950If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
1951all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
1952instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
1953call the real @code{malloc} function.
1954
1955You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 1956links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
1957you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
1958file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
1959call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
1960
6aa29e7b
JJ
1961@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
1962@item --eh-frame-hdr
1963Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
1964@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
1965
6c1439be
L
1966@kindex --enable-new-dtags
1967@kindex --disable-new-dtags
1968@item --enable-new-dtags
1969@itemx --disable-new-dtags
1970This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
1971systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
1972@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
1973If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
1974created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
1975those options are only available for ELF systems.
1976
2d643429 1977@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 1978@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
1979Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
1980close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
1981time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
1982increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
1983value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
1984
fdc90cb4
JJ
1985@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
1986@item --hash-style=@var{style}
1987Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
1988@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
1989new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
1990the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
1991hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
1992
35835446
JR
1993@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
1994@item --reduce-memory-overheads
1995This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 1996linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 1997for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
1998about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
1999
4f9c04f7 2000Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 20011021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2002run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2003has been used.
2004
2005The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2006enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2007
c0065db7
RM
2008@kindex --build-id
2009@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2010@item --build-id
2011@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2012Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2013The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2014file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2015@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2016parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2017@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2018@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2019an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2020characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2021omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2022
2023The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2024that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2025unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2026to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2027file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2028string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2029
2030Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2031@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2032@end table
2033
0285c67d
NC
2034@c man end
2035
36f63dca 2036@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2037
0285c67d
NC
2038@c man begin OPTIONS
2039
ff5dcc92 2040The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2041the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2042normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2043use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2044@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2045like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2046symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2047object file).
2048
2049In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2050support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2051PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2052values by either a space or an equals sign.
2053
ff5dcc92 2054@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2055
2056@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2057@item --add-stdcall-alias
2058If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2059as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2060[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2061
2062@kindex --base-file
2063@item --base-file @var{file}
2064Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2065addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2066@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2067[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2068
2069@kindex --dll
2070@item --dll
2071Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2072@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2073file.
bb10df36 2074[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2075
2076@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2077@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2078@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2079@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2080If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2081do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2082only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2083resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2084undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2085@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2086to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2087warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2088import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2089to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2090feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2091@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2092mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2093[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2094
2095@cindex DLLs, creating
2096@kindex --export-all-symbols
2097@item --export-all-symbols
2098If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2099be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2100otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2101explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2102attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2103option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2104@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2105@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2106exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2107re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2108such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2109@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2110@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2111Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2112not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2113extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2114(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2115These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2116@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2117@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2118@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2119@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2120[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2121
2122@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2123@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2124Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2125exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2126[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2127
2128@kindex --file-alignment
2129@item --file-alignment
2130Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2131file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2132512.
bb10df36 2133[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2134
2135@cindex heap size
2136@kindex --heap
2137@item --heap @var{reserve}
2138@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2139Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2140to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2141committed.
bb10df36 2142[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2143
2144@cindex image base
2145@kindex --image-base
2146@item --image-base @var{value}
2147Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2148the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2149is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2150your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2151other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2152for dlls.
bb10df36 2153[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2154
2155@kindex --kill-at
2156@item --kill-at
2157If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2158symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2159[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2160
26d2d8a2
BF
2161@kindex --large-address-aware
2162@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2163If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2164header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2165greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2166or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2167section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2168[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2169
252b5132
RH
2170@kindex --major-image-version
2171@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2172Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2173[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2174
2175@kindex --major-os-version
2176@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2177Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2178[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2179
2180@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2181@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2182Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2183[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2184
2185@kindex --minor-image-version
2186@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2187Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2188[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2189
2190@kindex --minor-os-version
2191@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2192Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2193[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2194
2195@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2196@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2197Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2198[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2199
2200@cindex DEF files, creating
2201@cindex DLLs, creating
2202@kindex --output-def
2203@item --output-def @var{file}
2204The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2205file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2206(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2207library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2208automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2209[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2210
b044cda1
CW
2211@cindex DLLs, creating
2212@kindex --out-implib
2213@item --out-implib @var{file}
2214The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2215import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2216import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2217may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2218makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2219creation step.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2221
2222@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2223@item --enable-auto-image-base
2224Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2225using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2226from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2227collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2228avoided.
bb10df36 2229[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2230
2231@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2232@item --disable-auto-image-base
2233Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2234user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2235default.
bb10df36 2236[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2237
2238@cindex DLLs, linking to
2239@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2240@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2241When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2242search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2243@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2244between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2245uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2246@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2247[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2248
2249@kindex --enable-auto-import
2250@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2251Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2252DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2253building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2254'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2255to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2256specification published by Microsoft.
2257
e2a83dd0
NC
2258Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2259data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2260placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2261around a problem with consts that is described here:
2262http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2263
4d8907ac
DS
2264Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2265see this message:
0d888aac 2266
ece2d90e 2267"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2268documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2269
ece2d90e
NC
2270This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2271ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2272allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2273fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2274constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2275multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2276this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2277of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2278the warning, and exit.
2279
2280There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2281data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2282
2fa9fc65
NC
2283One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2284of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2285this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2286
c0065db7
RM
2287A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2288that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2289there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2290a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2291
2292@example
2293extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2294extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2295 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2296@end example
2297
2298or
2299
2300@example
2301extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2302extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2303 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2304@end example
2305
c0065db7 2306For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2307is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2308
2309@example
2310extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2311extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2312 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2313@end example
2314
c406afaf
NC
2315or
2316
2317@example
2318extern long long extern_ll;
2319extern_ll -->
2320 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2321@end example
2322
2fa9fc65 2323A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2324'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2325@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2326requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2327building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2328merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2329between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2330constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2331
2332Original:
2333@example
2334--foo.h
2335extern int arr[];
2336--foo.c
2337#include "foo.h"
2338void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2339 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2340@}
2341@end example
2342
2343Solution 1:
2344@example
2345--foo.h
2346extern int arr[];
2347--foo.c
2348#include "foo.h"
2349void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2350 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2351 volatile int *parr = arr;
2352 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2353@}
2354@end example
2355
2356Solution 2:
2357@example
2358--foo.h
2359/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2360#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2361 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2362#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2363#else
2364#define FOO_IMPORT
2365#endif
2366extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2367--foo.c
2368#include "foo.h"
2369void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2370 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2371@}
2372@end example
2373
c0065db7 2374A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2375library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2376for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2377functions).
bb10df36 2378[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2379
2380@kindex --disable-auto-import
2381@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2382Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2383@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2384[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2385
2fa9fc65
NC
2386@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2387@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2388If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2389that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2390a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2391environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2392[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2393
2394@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2395@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2396Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2397DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2398[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2399
b044cda1
CW
2400@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2401@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2402Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2403[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2404
252b5132
RH
2405@kindex --section-alignment
2406@item --section-alignment
2407Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2408addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2409[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2410
2411@cindex stack size
2412@kindex --stack
2413@item --stack @var{reserve}
2414@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2415Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2416to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2417committed.
bb10df36 2418[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2419
2420@kindex --subsystem
2421@item --subsystem @var{which}
2422@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2423@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2424Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2425legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2426@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2427the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2428@var{which}.
bb10df36 2429[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2430
2431@end table
2432
0285c67d
NC
2433@c man end
2434
93fd0973
SC
2435@ifset M68HC11
2436@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2437
2438@c man begin OPTIONS
2439
2440The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2441memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2442
2443@table @gcctabopt
2444
2445@kindex --no-trampoline
2446@item --no-trampoline
2447This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2448is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2449instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2450
2451@kindex --bank-window
2452@item --bank-window @var{name}
2453This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2454the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2455The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2456paging and addresses within the memory window.
2457
2458@end table
2459
2460@c man end
2461@end ifset
2462
7fb9f789
NC
2463@ifset M68K
2464@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2465
2466@c man begin OPTIONS
2467
2468The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2469when linking for 68K targets.
2470
2471@table @gcctabopt
2472
2473@kindex --got
2474@item --got=@var{type}
2475This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2476@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2477@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2478Info entry for @file{ld}.
2479
2480@end table
2481
2482@c man end
2483@end ifset
2484
252b5132
RH
2485@ifset UsesEnvVars
2486@node Environment
2487@section Environment Variables
2488
0285c67d
NC
2489@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2490
560e09e9 2491You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2492@ifclear SingleFormat
2493@code{GNUTARGET},
2494@end ifclear
2495@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2496
36f63dca 2497@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2498@kindex GNUTARGET
2499@cindex default input format
2500@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2501use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2502of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2503@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2504of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2505attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2506this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2507there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2508object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2509BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2510in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2511@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2512
2513@kindex LDEMULATION
2514@cindex default emulation
2515@cindex emulation, default
2516@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2517@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2518behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2519available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2520the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2521variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2522linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2523
2524@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2525@cindex demangling, default
2526Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2527@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2528default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2529a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2530may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2531options.
2532
0285c67d
NC
2533@c man end
2534@end ifset
2535
252b5132
RH
2536@node Scripts
2537@chapter Linker Scripts
2538
2539@cindex scripts
2540@cindex linker scripts
2541@cindex command files
2542Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2543written in the linker command language.
2544
2545The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2546the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2547the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2548more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2549direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2550described below.
2551
2552The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2553yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2554linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2555to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2556such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2557
2558You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2559line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2560default linker script.
2561
2562You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2563to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2564Linker Scripts}.
2565
2566@menu
2567* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2568* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2569* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2570* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2571* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2572* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2573* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2574* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2575* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2576* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2577* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2578@end menu
2579
2580@node Basic Script Concepts
2581@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2582@cindex linker script concepts
2583We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2584describe the linker script language.
2585
2586The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2587file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2588@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2589The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2590purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2591among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2592section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2593in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2594
2595Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2596also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2597contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2598the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2599A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2600area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2601loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2602which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2603of debugging information.
2604
2605Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2606first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2607the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2608@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2609section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2610same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2611is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2612(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2613based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2614RAM address would be the VMA.
2615
2616You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2617program with the @samp{-h} option.
2618
2619Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2620@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2621has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2622information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2623will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2624static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2625referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2626
2627You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2628program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2629option.
2630
2631@node Script Format
2632@section Linker Script Format
2633@cindex linker script format
2634Linker scripts are text files.
2635
2636You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2637either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2638symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2639generally ignored.
2640
2641Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2642If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2643otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2644double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2645file name.
2646
2647You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2648@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2649to whitespace.
2650
2651@node Simple Example
2652@section Simple Linker Script Example
2653@cindex linker script example
2654@cindex example of linker script
2655Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2656
2657The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2658@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2659memory layout of the output file.
2660
2661The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2662describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2663code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2664@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2665Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2666your input files.
2667
2668For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
26690x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2670linker script which will do that:
2671@smallexample
2672SECTIONS
2673@{
2674 . = 0x10000;
2675 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2676 . = 0x8000000;
2677 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2678 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2679@}
2680@end smallexample
2681
2682You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2683followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2684descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2685
252b5132
RH
2686The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2687sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2688counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2689other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2690current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2691incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2692@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2693
2694The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2695required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2696after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2697which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2698wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2699means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2700
2701Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2702@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2703@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2704
2705The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2706the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2707at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2708output section, the value of the location counter will be
2709@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2710effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2711immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2712
2713The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2714alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2715example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2716sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2717may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2718sections.
2719
2720That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2721
2722@node Simple Commands
2723@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2724@cindex linker script simple commands
2725In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2726
2727@menu
2728* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2729* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2730@ifclear SingleFormat
2731* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2732@end ifclear
2733
2734* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2735@end menu
2736
2737@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2738@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2739@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2740@cindex start of execution
2741@cindex first instruction
2742@cindex entry point
2743The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2744point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2745entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2746@smallexample
2747ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2748@end smallexample
2749
2750There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2751entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2752stopping when one of them succeeds:
2753@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2754@item
252b5132 2755the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2756@item
252b5132 2757the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2758@item
252b5132 2759the value of the symbol @code{start}, if defined;
a1ab1d2a 2760@item
252b5132 2761the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2762@item
252b5132
RH
2763The address @code{0}.
2764@end itemize
2765
2766@node File Commands
36f63dca 2767@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2768@cindex linker script file commands
2769Several linker script commands deal with files.
2770
2771@table @code
2772@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2773@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2774@cindex including a linker script
2775Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2776be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2777with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
277810 levels deep.
2779
4006703d
NS
2780You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2781@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2782
252b5132
RH
2783@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2784@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2785@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2786@cindex input files in linker scripts
2787@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2788@cindex linker script input object files
2789The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2790in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2791
2792For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2793a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2794then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2795
2796In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2797script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2798
e3f2db7f
AO
2799In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2800with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2801located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2802for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2803open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2804linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2805description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2806
ff5dcc92 2807If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2808name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2809@samp{-l}.
2810
2811When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2812files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2813script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2814
2815@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2816@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2817@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
2818@cindex grouping input files
2819The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
2820files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
2821new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
2822in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
2823
b717d30e
JJ
2824@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2825@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2826@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
2827This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
2828commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
2829as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
2830with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
2831when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
2832@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
2833and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
2834setting afterwards.
2835
252b5132
RH
2836@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
2837@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 2838@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
2839The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
2840@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
2841@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
2842Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
2843precedence.
2844
2845You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
2846output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
2847
2848@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2849@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
2850@cindex library search path in linker script
2851@cindex archive search path in linker script
2852@cindex search path in linker script
2853The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 2854@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
2855@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
2856on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
2857are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
2858the command line option are searched first.
2859
2860@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
2861@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
2862@cindex first input file
2863The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
2864that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
2865though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
2866when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
2867first file.
2868@end table
2869
2870@ifclear SingleFormat
2871@node Format Commands
36f63dca 2872@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
2873A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
2874
2875@table @code
2876@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2877@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
2878@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
2879@cindex output file format in linker script
2880The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
2881output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 2882exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
2883(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
2884line option takes precedence.
2885
2886You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
2887formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
2888This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
2889desired endianness.
2890
2891If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
2892will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
2893output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
2894used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
2895
2896For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
2897command:
2898@smallexample
2899OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
2900@end smallexample
2901This says that the default format for the output file is
2902@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
2903option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
2904format.
2905
2906@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2907@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
2908@cindex input file format in linker script
2909The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
2910files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
2911This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
2912(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
2913is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
2914command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
2915@end table
2916@end ifclear
2917
2918@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 2919@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
2920There are a few other linker scripts commands.
2921
2922@table @code
2923@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
2924@kindex ASSERT
2925@cindex assertion in linker script
2926Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
2927with an error code, and print @var{message}.
2928
2929@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
2930@kindex EXTERN
2931@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
2932Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
2933symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
2934modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
2935each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
2936command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
2937
2938@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2939@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2940@cindex common allocation in linker script
2941This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 2942to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
2943output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
2944
4818e05f
AM
2945@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2946@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
2947@cindex common allocation in linker script
2948This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
2949command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
2950to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
2951
53d25da6
AM
2952@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
2953@kindex INSERT
2954@cindex insert user script into default script
2955This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
2956augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
2957inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
2958@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
2959default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
2960sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
2961linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
2962insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
2963linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
2964default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
2965of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
2966to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
2967is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
2968
2969@smallexample
2970SECTIONS
2971@{
2972 OVERLAY :
2973 @{
2974 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
2975 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
2976 @}
2977@}
2978INSERT AFTER .text;
2979@end smallexample
2980
252b5132
RH
2981@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
2982@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
2983@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 2984This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
2985references among certain output sections.
2986
2987In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
2988using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
2989will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
2990errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
2991a function defined in the other section.
2992
2993The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 2994@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
2995an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
2996@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
2997names.
2998
2999@ifclear SingleFormat
3000@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3001@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3002@cindex machine architecture
3003@cindex architecture
3004Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3005of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3006architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3007the @samp{-f} option.
3008@end ifclear
3009@end table
3010
3011@node Assignments
3012@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3013@cindex assignment in scripts
3014@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3015@cindex variables, defining
3016You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3017the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3018
3019@menu
3020* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3021* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3022* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3023* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3024@end menu
3025
3026@node Simple Assignments
3027@subsection Simple Assignments
3028
3029You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3030
3031@table @code
3032@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3033@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3034@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3035@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3036@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3037@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3038@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3039@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3040@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3041@end table
3042
3043The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3044@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3045defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3046
3047The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3048may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3049
3050The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3051
3052Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3053
3054You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3055statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3056section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3057
3058The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3059expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3060
3061Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3062assignments may be used:
3063
3064@smallexample
3065floating_point = 0;
3066SECTIONS
3067@{
3068 .text :
3069 @{
3070 *(.text)
3071 _etext = .;
3072 @}
156e34dd 3073 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3074 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3075@}
3076@end smallexample
3077@noindent
3078In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3079zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3080the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3081defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3082upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3083
3084@node PROVIDE
3085@subsection PROVIDE
3086@cindex PROVIDE
3087In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3088only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3089the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3090@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3091@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3092@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3093@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3094@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3095
3096Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3097@smallexample
3098SECTIONS
3099@{
3100 .text :
3101 @{
3102 *(.text)
3103 _etext = .;
3104 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3105 @}
3106@}
3107@end smallexample
3108
3109In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3110underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3111the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3112underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3113If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3114linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3115
7af8e998
L
3116@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3117@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3118@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3119Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3120hidden and won't be exported.
3121
73ae6183
NC
3122@node Source Code Reference
3123@subsection Source Code Reference
3124
3125Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3126intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3127a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3128symbol that does not have a value.
3129
3130Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3131transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3132stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3133prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3134mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3135of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3136variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3137linker script variable might be referred to as:
3138
3139@smallexample
3140 extern int foo;
3141@end smallexample
3142
3143But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3144
3145@smallexample
3146 _foo = 1000;
3147@end smallexample
3148
3149In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3150transformation has taken place.
3151
3152When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3153things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3154in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3155second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3156table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3157contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3158value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3159
3160@smallexample
3161 int foo = 1000;
3162@end smallexample
3163
3164creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3165holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3166number 1000 is initially stored.
3167
3168When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3169first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3170memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3171So:
3172
3173@smallexample
3174 foo = 1;
3175@end smallexample
3176
3177looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3178associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3179address. Whereas:
3180
3181@smallexample
3182 int * a = & foo;
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3186and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3187the variable @samp{a}.
3188
3189Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3190the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3191an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3192
3193@smallexample
3194 foo = 1000;
3195@end smallexample
3196
3197creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3198the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3199address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3200linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3201access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3202
3203Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3204you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3205use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3206section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3207linker script contains these declarations:
3208
3209@smallexample
3210@group
3211 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3212 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3213 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3214@end group
3215@end smallexample
3216
3217Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3218
3219@smallexample
3220@group
3221 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3222
73ae6183
NC
3223 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3224@end group
3225@end smallexample
3226
3227Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3228
252b5132 3229@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3230@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3231@kindex SECTIONS
3232The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3233into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3234
3235The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3236@smallexample
3237SECTIONS
3238@{
3239 @var{sections-command}
3240 @var{sections-command}
3241 @dots{}
3242@}
3243@end smallexample
3244
3245Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3246
3247@itemize @bullet
3248@item
3249an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3250@item
3251a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3252@item
3253an output section description
3254@item
3255an overlay description
3256@end itemize
3257
3258The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3259@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3260those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3261understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3262the layout of the output file.
3263
3264Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3265below.
3266
3267If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3268linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3269section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3270input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3271example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3272in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3273
3274@menu
3275* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3276* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3277* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3278* Input Section:: Input section description
3279* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3280* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3281* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3282* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3283* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3284@end menu
3285
3286@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3287@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3288The full description of an output section looks like this:
3289@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3290@group
7e7d5768 3291@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3292 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3293 @{
3294 @var{output-section-command}
3295 @var{output-section-command}
3296 @dots{}
562d3460 3297 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3298@end group
3299@end smallexample
3300
3301Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3302
3303The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3304name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3305The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3306
3307Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3308
3309@itemize @bullet
3310@item
3311a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3312@item
3313an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3314@item
3315data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3316@item
3317a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3318@end itemize
3319
3320@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3321@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3322@cindex name, section
3323@cindex section name
3324The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3325meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3326support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3327must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3328example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3329output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3330names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3331quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3332characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3333commas must be quoted.
3334
3335The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3336Discarding}.
3337
3338@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3339@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3340@cindex address, section
3341@cindex section address
3342The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
3343address) of the output section. If you do not provide @var{address},
3344the linker will set it based on @var{region} if present, or otherwise
3345based on the current value of the location counter.
3346
3347If you provide @var{address}, the address of the output section will be
3348set to precisely that. If you provide neither @var{address} nor
3349@var{region}, then the address of the output section will be set to the
3350current value of the location counter aligned to the alignment
3351requirements of the output section. The alignment requirement of the
3352output section is the strictest alignment of any input section contained
3353within the output section.
3354
3355For example,
3356@smallexample
3357.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3358@end smallexample
3359@noindent
3360and
3361@smallexample
3362.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3363@end smallexample
3364@noindent
3365are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3366@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3367counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
3368counter aligned to the strictest alignment of a @samp{.text} input
3369section.
3370
3371The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3372For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3373so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3374do something like this:
3375@smallexample
3376.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3377@end smallexample
3378@noindent
3379This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3380aligned upward to the specified value.
3381
3382Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
3383location counter.
3384
3385@node Input Section
36f63dca 3386@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3387@cindex input sections
3388@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3389The most common output section command is an input section description.
3390
3391The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3392You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3393in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3394map the input files into your memory layout.
3395
3396@menu
3397* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3398* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3399* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3400* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3401* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3402@end menu
3403
3404@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3405@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3406@cindex input section basics
3407An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3408by a list of section names in parentheses.
3409
3410The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3411describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3412
3413The most common input section description is to include all input
3414sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3415include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3416@smallexample
3417*(.text)
3418@end smallexample
3419@noindent
18625d54
CM
3420Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3421of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3422match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3423example:
252b5132 3424@smallexample
b4346c09 3425*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3426@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3427will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3428@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3429
3430There are two ways to include more than one section:
3431@smallexample
3432*(.text .rdata)
3433*(.text) *(.rdata)
3434@end smallexample
3435@noindent
3436The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3437@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3438first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3439they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3440@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3441@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3442
3443You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3444You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3445needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3446@smallexample
3447data.o(.data)
3448@end smallexample
3449
967928e9
AM
3450You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3451matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3452with no whitespace around the colon.
3453
3454@table @samp
3455@item archive:file
3456matches file within archive
3457@item archive:
3458matches the whole archive
3459@item :file
3460matches file but not one in an archive
3461@end table
3462
3463Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3464wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3465single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3466@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3467within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3468also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3469other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3470from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3471command.
3472
252b5132
RH
3473If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3474the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3475commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3476@smallexample
3477data.o
3478@end smallexample
3479
967928e9
AM
3480When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3481and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3482characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3483name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3484did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3485though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3486@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3487the archive search path.
3488
3489@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3490@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3491@cindex input section wildcards
3492@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3493@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3494@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3495In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3496name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3497
3498The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3499pattern for the file name.
3500
3501The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3502
3503@table @samp
3504@item *
3505matches any number of characters
3506@item ?
3507matches any single character
3508@item [@var{chars}]
3509matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3510character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3511@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3512@item \
3513quotes the following character
3514@end table
3515
3516When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3517will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3518Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3519exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3520@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3521a @samp{/} character.
3522
3523File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3524specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3525does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3526
3527If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3528appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3529will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3530sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3531@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3532@smallexample
3533.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3534.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3535@end smallexample
3536
bcaa7b3e 3537@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3538Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3539in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3540this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3541pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3542@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3543into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3544
bcaa7b3e
L
3545@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3546@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3547difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3548ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3549
3550@cindex SORT
3551@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3552
3553When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3554can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3555
3556@enumerate
3557@item
3558@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3559It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3560sections have the same name.
3561@item
3562@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3563It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3564sections have the same alignment.
3565@item
c0065db7 3566@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3567treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3568@item
3569@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3570is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3571@item
3572All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3573@end enumerate
3574
3575When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3576section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3577takes precedence over the command line option.
3578
3579If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3580command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3581treated as nested sorting command.
3582
3583@enumerate
3584@item
3585@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3586@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3587@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3588@item
3589@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3590@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3591@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3592@end enumerate
3593
3594If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3595command line option will be ignored.
3596
252b5132
RH
3597If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3598@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3599precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3600
3601This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3602files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3603sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3604The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3605with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3606linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3607@smallexample
3608@group
3609SECTIONS @{
3610 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3611 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3612 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3613 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3614@}
3615@end group
3616@end smallexample
3617
3618@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3619@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3620@cindex common symbol placement
3621@cindex uninitialized data placement
3622A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
3623file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
3624linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
3625named @samp{COMMON}.
3626
3627You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
3628other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
3629particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
3630input files are placed in another section.
3631
3632In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
3633@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
3634@smallexample
3635.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
3636@end smallexample
3637
3638@cindex scommon section
3639@cindex small common symbols
3640Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
3641example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
3642symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
3643different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
3644the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
3645symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
3646to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
3647locations.
3648
3649@cindex [COMMON]
3650You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
3651notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
3652@samp{*(COMMON)}.
3653
3654@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 3655@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
3656@cindex KEEP
3657@cindex garbage collection
3658When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 3659it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
3660This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
3661with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 3662@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
3663
3664@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 3665@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
3666The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
3667to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
3668start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
3669@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
3670follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
3671@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
3672@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
3673All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
3674files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
3675
3676@smallexample
3677@group
3678SECTIONS @{
3679 outputa 0x10000 :
3680 @{
3681 all.o
3682 foo.o (.input1)
3683 @}
36f63dca
NC
3684@end group
3685@group
252b5132
RH
3686 outputb :
3687 @{
3688 foo.o (.input2)
3689 foo1.o (.input1)
3690 @}
36f63dca
NC
3691@end group
3692@group
252b5132
RH
3693 outputc :
3694 @{
3695 *(.input1)
3696 *(.input2)
3697 @}
3698@}
3699@end group
a1ab1d2a 3700@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
3701
3702@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 3703@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
3704@cindex data
3705@cindex section data
3706@cindex output section data
3707@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
3708@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
3709@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
3710@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
3711@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
3712You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
3713@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
3714an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
3715parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
3716value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
3717counter.
3718
3719The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
3720store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
3721bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
3722stored.
3723
3724For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
3725of the symbol @samp{addr}:
3726@smallexample
3727BYTE(1)
3728LONG(addr)
3729@end smallexample
3730
3731When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
3732same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
3733target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
3734@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
3735@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
3736
3737If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
3738which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
3739When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
3740true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
3741endianness of the first input object file.
3742
36f63dca 3743Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
3744between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
3745@smallexample
3746SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3747@end smallexample
3748whereas this will work:
3749@smallexample
3750SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
3751@end smallexample
3752
252b5132
RH
3753@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
3754@cindex holes, filling
3755@cindex unspecified memory
3756You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
3757current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
3758otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
3759gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 3760with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
3761necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
3762point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
3763than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
3764different parts of an output section.
3765
3766This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 3767value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 3768@smallexample
563e308f 3769FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
3770@end smallexample
3771
3772The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 3773section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
3774part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
3775entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 3776precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 3777expression.
252b5132
RH
3778
3779@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 3780@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
3781There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
3782commands.
3783
3784@table @code
3785@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3786@cindex input filename symbols
3787@cindex filename symbols
3788@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
3789The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
3790The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
3791file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
3792the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
3793
3794This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
3795normally used for any other object file format.
3796
3797@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
3798@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
3799@cindex constructors, arranging in link
3800@item CONSTRUCTORS
3801When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
3802unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
3803destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
3804arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
3805automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
3806For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
3807linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
3808@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
3809ignored for other object file formats.
3810
3811The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
3812constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
3813Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
3814the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
3815first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
3816of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
3817compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
3818formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
3819@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
3820the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
3821destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
3822@code{exit}.
3823
3824For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
3825arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
3826addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
3827and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
3828linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
3829runtime code expects to see.
3830
3831@smallexample
3832 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
3833 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3834 *(.ctors)
3835 LONG(0)
3836 __CTOR_END__ = .;
3837 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
3838 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
3839 *(.dtors)
3840 LONG(0)
3841 __DTOR_END__ = .;
3842@end smallexample
3843
3844If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
3845which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
3846are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
3847are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
3848command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
3849@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
3850@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
3851@samp{*(.dtors)}.
3852
3853Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
3854and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
3855need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
3856scripts.
3857
3858@end table
3859
3860@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 3861@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
3862@cindex discarding sections
3863@cindex sections, discarding
3864@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
3865The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
3866for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
3867be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 3868@smallexample
49c13adb 3869.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
3870@end smallexample
3871@noindent
3872will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
3873@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
3874sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
3875space in an output section will also create the output section.
3876
a0976ea4 3877The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
3878on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
3879symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
3880the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
3881section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
3882
3883@cindex /DISCARD/
3884The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
3885input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
3886section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
3887
3888@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 3889@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
3890@cindex output section attributes
3891We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
3892like this:
3893@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3894@group
7e7d5768 3895@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
bbf115d3 3896 [AT(@var{lma})] [ALIGN(@var{section_align})] [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
252b5132
RH
3897 @{
3898 @var{output-section-command}
3899 @var{output-section-command}
3900 @dots{}
562d3460 3901 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3902@end group
3903@end smallexample
3904We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
3905@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
3906remaining section attributes.
3907
a1ab1d2a 3908@menu
252b5132
RH
3909* Output Section Type:: Output section type
3910* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 3911* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 3912* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
252b5132
RH
3913* Output Section Region:: Output section region
3914* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
3915* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
3916@end menu
3917
3918@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 3919@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
3920Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
3921parentheses. The following types are defined:
3922
3923@table @code
3924@item NOLOAD
3925The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
3926loaded into memory when the program is run.
3927@item DSECT
3928@itemx COPY
3929@itemx INFO
3930@itemx OVERLAY
3931These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
3932rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
3933marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
3934section when the program is run.
3935@end table
3936
3937@kindex NOLOAD
3938@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
3939@cindex loading, preventing
3940The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
3941the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
3942the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
3943@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
3944need to be loaded when the program is run. The contents of the
3945@samp{ROM} section will appear in the linker output file as usual.
3946@smallexample
3947@group
3948SECTIONS @{
3949 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
3950 @dots{}
3951@}
3952@end group
3953@end smallexample
3954
3955@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 3956@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 3957@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
3958@kindex AT(@var{lma})
3959@cindex load address
3960@cindex section load address
3961Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
3962@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The address expression which may appear in
3963an output section description sets the VMA (@pxref{Output Section
3964Address}).
3965
dc0b6aa0
AM
3966The expression @var{lma} that follows the @code{AT} keyword specifies
3967the load address of the section.
6bdafbeb
NC
3968
3969Alternatively, with @samp{AT>@var{lma_region}} expression, you may
3970specify a memory region for the section's load address. @xref{MEMORY}.
3971Note that if the section has not had a VMA assigned to it then the
3972linker will use the @var{lma_region} as the VMA region as well.
dc0b6aa0
AM
3973
3974If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
3975section, the linker will set the LMA such that the difference between
3976VMA and LMA for the section is the same as the preceding output
3977section in the same region. If there is no preceding output section
3978or the section is not allocatable, the linker will set the LMA equal
3979to the VMA.
6bdafbeb 3980@xref{Output Section Region}.
252b5132
RH
3981
3982@cindex ROM initialized data
3983@cindex initialized data in ROM
3984This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
3985example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
3986called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
3987@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
3988even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
3989uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
3990defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
3991counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
3992
3993@smallexample
3994@group
3995SECTIONS
3996 @{
3997 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 3998 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
3999 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4000 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4001 .bss 0x3000 :
4002 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4003@}
4004@end group
4005@end smallexample
4006
4007The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4008this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4009the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4010how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4011script.
4012
4013@smallexample
4014@group
4015extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4016char *src = &_etext;
4017char *dst = &_data;
4018
4019/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4020while (dst < &_edata) @{
4021 *dst++ = *src++;
4022@}
4023
4024/* Zero bss */
4025for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4026 *dst = 0;
4027@end group
4028@end smallexample
4029
bbf115d3
L
4030@node Forced Output Alignment
4031@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4032@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4033@cindex forcing output section alignment
4034@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4035You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4036
7e7d5768
AM
4037@node Forced Input Alignment
4038@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4039@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4040@cindex forcing input section alignment
4041@cindex input section alignment
4042You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4043SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4044sections, whether larger or smaller.
4045
252b5132 4046@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4047@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4048@kindex >@var{region}
4049@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4050@cindex memory regions and sections
4051You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4052using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4053
4054Here is a simple example:
4055@smallexample
4056@group
4057MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4058SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4059@end group
4060@end smallexample
4061
4062@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4063@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4064@kindex :@var{phdr}
4065@cindex section, assigning to program header
4066@cindex program headers and sections
4067You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4068using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4069one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4070assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4071@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4072linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4073
4074Here is a simple example:
4075@smallexample
4076@group
4077PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4078SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4079@end group
4080@end smallexample
4081
4082@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4083@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4084@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4085@cindex section fill pattern
4086@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4087You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4088@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4089(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4090within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4091alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4092necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4093of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4094an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4095fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4096other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4097pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4098expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4099
4100You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4101output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4102
4103Here is a simple example:
4104@smallexample
4105@group
563e308f 4106SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4107@end group
4108@end smallexample
4109
4110@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4111@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4112@kindex OVERLAY
4113@cindex overlays
4114An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4115are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4116the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4117copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4118required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4119can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4120than another.
4121
4122Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4123@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4124output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4125command is as follows:
4126@smallexample
4127@group
4128OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4129 @{
4130 @var{secname1}
4131 @{
4132 @var{output-section-command}
4133 @var{output-section-command}
4134 @dots{}
4135 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4136 @var{secname2}
4137 @{
4138 @var{output-section-command}
4139 @var{output-section-command}
4140 @dots{}
4141 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4142 @dots{}
4143 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4144@end group
4145@end smallexample
4146
4147Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4148section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4149section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4150those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4151except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4152sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4153
4154The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4155addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4156memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4157whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4158and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4159and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4160
4161If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4162among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4163all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4164section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4165NOCROSSREFS}.
4166
4167For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4168provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4169defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4170@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4171the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4172within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4173symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4174
4175At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4176the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4177
4178Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4179@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4180@smallexample
4181@group
4182 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4183 @{
4184 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4185 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4186 @}
4187@end group
4188@end smallexample
4189@noindent
4190This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4191address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4192@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4193following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4194@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4195@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4196
4197C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4198like the following.
4199
4200@smallexample
4201@group
4202 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4203 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4204 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4205@end group
4206@end smallexample
4207
4208Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4209everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4210example could have been written identically as follows.
4211
4212@smallexample
4213@group
4214 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4215 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4216 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4217 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4218 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4219 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4220 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4221@end group
4222@end smallexample
4223
4224@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4225@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4226@kindex MEMORY
4227@cindex memory regions
4228@cindex regions of memory
4229@cindex allocating memory
4230@cindex discontinuous memory
4231The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4232memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4233
4234The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4235memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4236may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4237can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4238set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4239regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4240around to fit into the available regions.
4241
4242A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4243command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4244you wish. The syntax is:
4245@smallexample
4246@group
a1ab1d2a 4247MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4248 @{
4249 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4250 @dots{}
4251 @}
4252@end group
4253@end smallexample
4254
4255The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4256region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4257Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4258with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4259must have a distinct name.
4260
4261@cindex memory region attributes
4262The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4263whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4264not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4265@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4266section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4267the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4268them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4269
4270The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4271@table @samp
4272@item R
4273Read-only section
4274@item W
4275Read/write section
4276@item X
4277Executable section
4278@item A
4279Allocatable section
4280@item I
4281Initialized section
4282@item L
4283Same as @samp{I}
4284@item !
4285Invert the sense of any of the preceding attributes
4286@end table
4287
4288If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4289@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4290attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4291in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4292attributes.
4293
4294@kindex ORIGIN =
4295@kindex o =
4296@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4297The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4298the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4299cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4300abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4301@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4302
4303@kindex LENGTH =
4304@kindex len =
4305@kindex l =
4306The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4307region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4308be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4309@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4310
4311In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4312available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4313and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4314linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4315is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4316or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4317explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4318region.
4319
4320@smallexample
4321@group
a1ab1d2a 4322MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4323 @{
4324 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4325 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4326 @}
4327@end group
4328@end smallexample
4329
4330Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4331specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4332@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4333a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4334output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4335was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4336the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4337output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4338region, the linker will issue an error message.
4339
3ec57632 4340It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4341expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4342@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4343
4344@smallexample
4345@group
c0065db7 4346 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4347@end group
4348@end smallexample
4349
252b5132
RH
4350@node PHDRS
4351@section PHDRS Command
4352@kindex PHDRS
4353@cindex program headers
4354@cindex ELF program headers
4355@cindex program segments
4356@cindex segments, ELF
4357The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4358@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4359loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4360program with the @samp{-p} option.
4361
4362When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4363reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4364program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4365This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4366interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4367
4368The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4369in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4370precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4371the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4372not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4373
4374The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4375generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4376ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4377
4378This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4379@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4380
4381@smallexample
4382@group
4383PHDRS
4384@{
4385 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4386 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4387@}
4388@end group
4389@end smallexample
4390
4391The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4392of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4393header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4394with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
4395must have a distinct name.
4396
4397Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4398system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4399specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4400sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4401attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4402Section Phdr}.
4403
4404It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4405merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4406repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4407contain the section.
4408
4409If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4410then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4411not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4412convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4413placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4414default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4415segment at all.
4416
4417@kindex FILEHDR
4418@kindex PHDRS
4419You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords appear after
4420the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4421The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4422file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
4423include the ELF program headers themselves.
4424
4425The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4426value of the keyword.
4427
4428@table @asis
4429@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4430Indicates an unused program header.
4431
4432@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4433Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4434the file.
4435
4436@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4437Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4438
4439@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4440Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4441found.
4442
4443@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4444Indicates a segment holding note information.
4445
4446@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4447A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4448ABI.
4449
4450@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4451Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4452
4453@item @var{expression}
4454An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4455be used for types not defined above.
4456@end table
4457
4458You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4459in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4460@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4461Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4462output section attribute.
4463
4464The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4465which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4466explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4467an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4468header.
4469
4470Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4471headers used on a native ELF system.
4472
4473@example
4474@group
4475PHDRS
4476@{
4477 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4478 interp PT_INTERP ;
4479 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4480 data PT_LOAD ;
4481 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4482@}
4483
4484SECTIONS
4485@{
4486 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4487 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4488 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4489 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4490 @dots{}
4491 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4492 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4493 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4494 @dots{}
4495@}
4496@end group
4497@end example
4498
4499@node VERSION
4500@section VERSION Command
4501@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4502@cindex symbol versions
4503@cindex version script
4504@cindex versions of symbols
4505The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4506only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4507symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4508a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4509shared library.
4510
4511You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4512you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4513also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4514
4515The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4516@smallexample
4517VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4518@end smallexample
4519
4520The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4521Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4522version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4523version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4524version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4525scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4526library.
4527
4528The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4529examples.
4530
4531@smallexample
4532VERS_1.1 @{
4533 global:
4534 foo1;
4535 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4536 old*;
4537 original*;
4538 new*;
252b5132
RH
4539@};
4540
4541VERS_1.2 @{
4542 foo2;
4543@} VERS_1.1;
4544
4545VERS_2.0 @{
4546 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4547 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb
MM
4548 ns::*;
4549 "int f(int, double)";
c0065db7 4550 @}
252b5132
RH
4551@} VERS_1.2;
4552@end smallexample
4553
4554This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4555version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4556The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4557a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4558of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4559symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4560is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4561in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4562However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4563name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4564
4565Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4566depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4567to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4568
4569Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4570depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4571and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4572
4573When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4574specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4575unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4576unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4577somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4578wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4579wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4580set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4581ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4582
4583The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
4584they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
4585could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
4586However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
4587
0f6bf451 4588Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
4589in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
4590symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
4591won't.
4592
4593@smallexample
7c9c73be 4594@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 4595@end smallexample
6b9b879a 4596
252b5132
RH
4597When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
4598symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
4599requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
4600shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
4601loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
4602linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
4603application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
4604way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
4605all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
4606search for each symbol reference.
4607
4608The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
4609doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
4610that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
4611functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
4612the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
4613required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
4614that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
4615versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
4616the libraries being used with the application are too old.
4617
4618There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
4619first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
4620source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
4621script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
4622maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
4623@smallexample
4624__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4625@end smallexample
4626@noindent
4627in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
4628be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
4629The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
4630@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
4631takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
4632
4633The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
4634function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
4635an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
4636version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
4637linked against the old interface to continue to function.
4638
4639To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
4640source file. Here is an example:
4641
4642@smallexample
4643__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
4644__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
4645__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
4646__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
4647@end smallexample
4648
4649In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
4650unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
4651example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
4652@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
4653
4654When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
4655some way to specify a default version to which external references to
4656this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
4657@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
4658declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
4659you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
4660
4661If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
4662within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 4663(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
4664specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
4665
cb840a31
L
4666You can also specify the language in the version script:
4667
4668@smallexample
4669VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
4670@end smallexample
4671
c0065db7 4672The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
4673The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
4674demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
4675patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}.
4676
86043bbb
MM
4677Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
4678described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
4679or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
4680the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
4681whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
4682cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
4683might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
4684should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
4685expect when you upgrade.
4686
252b5132
RH
4687@node Expressions
4688@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
4689@cindex expressions
4690@cindex arithmetic
4691The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
4692that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
4693expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
4694host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
4695
4696You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
4697
4698The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
4699expressions.
4700
4701@menu
4702* Constants:: Constants
4703* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 4704* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
4705* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
4706* Operators:: Operators
4707* Evaluation:: Evaluation
4708* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
4709* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
4710@end menu
4711
4712@node Constants
4713@subsection Constants
4714@cindex integer notation
4715@cindex constants in linker scripts
4716All constants are integers.
4717
4718As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
4719octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
4720hexadecimal. The linker considers other integers to be decimal.
4721
4722@cindex scaled integers
4723@cindex K and M integer suffixes
4724@cindex M and K integer suffixes
4725@cindex suffixes for integers
4726@cindex integer suffixes
4727In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
4728constant by
4729@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4730@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4731@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4732@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
4733@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4734@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4735@tex
4736${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
4737@end tex
4738@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4739respectively. For example, the following all refer to the same quantity:
4740@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4741_fourk_1 = 4K;
4742_fourk_2 = 4096;
4743_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
252b5132
RH
4744@end smallexample
4745
4746@node Symbols
4747@subsection Symbol Names
4748@cindex symbol names
4749@cindex names
4750@cindex quoted symbol names
4751@kindex "
4752Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
4753and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
4754Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
4755specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
4756keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
4757@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
4758"SECTION" = 9;
4759"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
4760@end smallexample
4761
4762Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
4763to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
4764whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
4765
ecca9871
L
4766@node Orphan Sections
4767@subsection Orphan Sections
4768@cindex orphan
4769Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
4770are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
4771script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
4772output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
4773placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
4774attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
4775same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
4776If there is not enough room to do this then it places
4777at the end of the file.
4778
4779For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
4780well as section flag.
4781
41911f68 4782If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 4783the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
4784__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
4785section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
4786orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
4787representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
4788character.
4789
252b5132
RH
4790@node Location Counter
4791@subsection The Location Counter
4792@kindex .
4793@cindex dot
4794@cindex location counter
4795@cindex current output location
4796The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
4797current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
4798location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
4799within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
4800anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
4801
4802@cindex holes
4803Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
4804moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
4805location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
4806and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
4807doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
4808
4809@smallexample
4810SECTIONS
4811@{
4812 output :
4813 @{
4814 file1(.text)
4815 . = . + 1000;
4816 file2(.text)
4817 . += 1000;
4818 file3(.text)
563e308f 4819 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
4820@}
4821@end smallexample
4822@noindent
4823In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
4824located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
4825followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
4826@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 4827@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
4828specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
4829
5c6bbab8
NC
4830@cindex dot inside sections
4831Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
4832current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 4833statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
4834absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
4835however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
4836not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
4837
4838@smallexample
4839SECTIONS
4840@{
4841 . = 0x100
4842 .text: @{
4843 *(.text)
4844 . = 0x200
4845 @}
4846 . = 0x500
4847 .data: @{
4848 *(.data)
4849 . += 0x600
4850 @}
4851@}
4852@end smallexample
4853
4854The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
4855and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
4856the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
4857much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
4858move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
4859and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
4860the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
4861the @samp{.data} output section itself.
4862
b5666f2f
AM
4863@cindex dot outside sections
4864Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
4865output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
4866needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
4867
4868@smallexample
4869SECTIONS
4870@{
4871 start_of_text = . ;
4872 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4873 end_of_text = . ;
4874
4875 start_of_data = . ;
4876 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4877 end_of_data = . ;
4878@}
4879@end smallexample
4880
4881If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
4882not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
4883between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
4884should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
4885blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
4886the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
4887sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
4888statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
4889special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
4890place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
4891as follows:
4892
4893@smallexample
4894SECTIONS
4895@{
4896 start_of_text = . ;
4897 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4898 end_of_text = . ;
4899
4900 start_of_data = . ;
4901 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
4902 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4903 end_of_data = . ;
4904@}
4905@end smallexample
4906
4907This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
4908@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
4909placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
4910assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
4911a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
4912section. So you could write:
4913
4914@smallexample
4915SECTIONS
4916@{
4917 start_of_text = . ;
4918 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
4919 end_of_text = . ;
4920
4921 . = . ;
4922 start_of_data = . ;
4923 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
4924 end_of_data = . ;
4925@}
4926@end smallexample
4927
4928Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
4929@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
4930
252b5132
RH
4931@need 2000
4932@node Operators
4933@subsection Operators
4934@cindex operators for arithmetic
4935@cindex arithmetic operators
4936@cindex precedence in expressions
4937The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
4938the standard bindings and precedence levels:
4939@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4940@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4941@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
4942@smallexample
4943precedence associativity Operators Notes
4944(highest)
49451 left ! - ~ (1)
49462 left * / %
49473 left + -
49484 left >> <<
49495 left == != > < <= >=
49506 left &
49517 left |
49528 left &&
49539 left ||
495410 right ? :
495511 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
4956(lowest)
4957@end smallexample
4958Notes:
a1ab1d2a 4959(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
4960(2) @xref{Assignments}.
4961@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 4962@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
4963@tex
4964\vskip \baselineskip
4965%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
4966\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
4967\hrule
4968\halign
4969{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
4970height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4971&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
4972height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4973\noalign{\hrule}
4974height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
4975&highest&&&&&\cr
4976% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 4977&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
4978&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
4979&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
4980&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
4981&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
4982&6&&left&&\&&\cr
4983&7&&left&&|&\cr
4984&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
4985&9&&left&&||&\cr
4986&10&&right&&? :&\cr
4987&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
4988&lowest&&&&&\cr
4989height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
4990\hrule}
4991@end tex
4992@iftex
4993{
4994@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
4995@dag@quad Prefix operators.
4996@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
4997}
4998@end iftex
4999@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5000
5001@node Evaluation
5002@subsection Evaluation
5003@cindex lazy evaluation
5004@cindex expression evaluation order
5005The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5006an expression when absolutely necessary.
5007
5008The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5009address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5010regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5011as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5012
5013However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5014until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5015other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5016for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5017
5018The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5019assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5020allocation.
5021
5022Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5023@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5024
5025If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5026available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5027following
5028@smallexample
5029@group
5030SECTIONS
5031 @{
a1ab1d2a 5032 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5033 @{ *(.text) @}
5034 @}
5035@end group
5036@end smallexample
5037@noindent
5038will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5039address}.
5040
5041@node Expression Section
5042@subsection The Section of an Expression
5043@cindex expression sections
5044@cindex absolute expressions
5045@cindex relative expressions
5046@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5047@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5048@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
5049When the linker evaluates an expression, the result is either absolute
5050or relative to some section. A relative expression is expressed as a
5051fixed offset from the base of a section.
5052
5053The position of the expression within the linker script determines
5054whether it is absolute or relative. An expression which appears within
5055an output section definition is relative to the base of the output
5056section. An expression which appears elsewhere will be absolute.
5057
5058A symbol set to a relative expression will be relocatable if you request
5059relocatable output using the @samp{-r} option. That means that a
5060further link operation may change the value of the symbol. The symbol's
5061section will be the section of the relative expression.
5062
5063A symbol set to an absolute expression will retain the same value
5064through any further link operation. The symbol will be absolute, and
5065will not have any particular associated section.
5066
5067You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5068to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5069create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5070section @samp{.data}:
5071@smallexample
5072SECTIONS
5073 @{
5074 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5075 @}
5076@end smallexample
5077@noindent
5078If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5079@samp{.data} section.
5080
5081@node Builtin Functions
5082@subsection Builtin Functions
5083@cindex functions in expressions
5084The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5085use in linker script expressions.
5086
5087@table @code
5088@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5089@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5090@cindex expression, absolute
5091Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5092of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5093value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5094normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5095
5096@item ADDR(@var{section})
5097@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5098@cindex section address in expression
5099Return the absolute address (the VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
5100script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
5101the following example, @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned
5102identical values:
5103@smallexample
5104@group
5105SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5106 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5107 @{
252b5132
RH
5108 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5109 @dots{}
5110 @}
5111 .output :
5112 @{
5113 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5114 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5115 @}
5116@dots{} @}
5117@end group
5118@end smallexample
5119
876f4090
NS
5120@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5121@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5122@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5123@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5124@cindex round up location counter
5125@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5126@cindex round up expression
5127@cindex align expression
5128Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5129to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5130doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5131arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5132expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5133equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5134
5135Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5136next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5137variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5138input sections:
252b5132
RH
5139@smallexample
5140@group
5141SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5142 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5143 *(.data)
5144 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5145 @}
5146@dots{} @}
5147@end group
5148@end smallexample
5149@noindent
5150The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5151a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5152a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5153of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5154
5155The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5156
362c1d1a
NS
5157@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5158@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5159@cindex section alignment
5160Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5161been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5162evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5163the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5164value in that section.
5165@smallexample
5166@group
5167SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5168 .output @{
5169 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5170 @dots{}
5171 @}
5172@dots{} @}
5173@end group
5174@end smallexample
5175
252b5132
RH
5176@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5177@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5178This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5179scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5180section.
5181
2d20f7bf
JJ
5182@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5183@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5184This is equivalent to either
5185@smallexample
5186(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5187@end smallexample
5188or
5189@smallexample
5190(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5191@end smallexample
5192@noindent
5193depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5194for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5195@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5196If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5197memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5198bytes in the on-disk file.
5199
5200This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5201any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5202@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5203be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5204working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5205
5206@noindent
5207Example:
5208@smallexample
5209 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5210@end smallexample
5211
5212@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5213@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5214This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5215evaluation purposes.
5216
5217@smallexample
5218 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5219@end smallexample
5220
a4f5ad88
JJ
5221@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5222@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5223This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5224@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5225When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5226does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5227@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5228boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5229it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5230@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5231
5232@smallexample
5233 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5234@end smallexample
5235
252b5132
RH
5236@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5237@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5238@cindex symbol defaults
5239Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5240defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5241return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5242default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5243shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5244the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5245existed, its value is preserved:
5246
5247@smallexample
5248@group
5249SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5250 .text : @{
5251 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5252 @dots{}
5253 @}
5254 @dots{}
5255@}
5256@end group
5257@end smallexample
5258
3ec57632
NC
5259@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5260@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5261Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5262
252b5132
RH
5263@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5264@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5265@cindex section load address in expression
5266Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. This is normally
5267the same as @code{ADDR}, but it may be different if the @code{AT}
5268attribute is used in the output section definition (@pxref{Output
5269Section LMA}).
5270
5271@kindex MAX
5272@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5273Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5274
5275@kindex MIN
5276@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5277Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5278
5279@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5280@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5281@cindex unallocated address, next
5282Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5283This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5284use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5285output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5286
3ec57632
NC
5287@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5288@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5289Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5290
ba916c8a
MM
5291@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5292@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5293Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5294value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5295option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5296@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5297be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
5298``bss'' sections, but you use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
5299name.
5300
252b5132
RH
5301@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5302@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5303@cindex section size
5304Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5305been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5306evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5307@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5308@smallexample
5309@group
5310SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5311 .output @{
5312 .start = . ;
5313 @dots{}
5314 .end = . ;
5315 @}
5316 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5317 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5318@dots{} @}
5319@end group
5320@end smallexample
5321
5322@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5323@itemx sizeof_headers
5324@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5325@cindex header size
5326Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5327information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5328this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5329choose, to facilitate paging.
5330
5331@cindex not enough room for program headers
5332@cindex program headers, not enough room
5333When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5334@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5335number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5336addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5337additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5338room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5339the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5340script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5341you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5342command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5343@end table
5344
5345@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5346@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5347@cindex implicit linker scripts
5348If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5349an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5350linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5351linker will report an error.
5352
5353An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5354
5355Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5356assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5357commands.
5358
5359Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5360at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5361read. This can affect archive searching.
5362
5363@ifset GENERIC
5364@node Machine Dependent
5365@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5366
5367@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5368@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5369sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5370functionality are not listed.
5371
5372@menu
36f63dca
NC
5373@ifset H8300
5374* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5375@end ifset
5376@ifset I960
5377* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5378@end ifset
5379@ifset ARM
5380* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5381@end ifset
5382@ifset HPPA
5383* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5384@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5385@ifset M68K
5386* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5387@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5388@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5389* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5390@end ifset
2469cfa2 5391@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5392* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5393@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5394@ifset M68HC11
5395* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5396@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5397@ifset POWERPC
5398* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5399@end ifset
5400@ifset POWERPC64
5401* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5402@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5403@ifset SPU
5404* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5405@end ifset
74459f0e 5406@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5407* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5408@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5409@ifset WIN32
5410* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5411@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5412@ifset XTENSA
5413* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5414@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5415@end menu
5416@end ifset
5417
252b5132
RH
5418@ifset H8300
5419@ifclear GENERIC
5420@raisesections
5421@end ifclear
5422
5423@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5424@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5425
5426@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5427For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5428you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5429
5430@table @emph
5431@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5432@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5433@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5434targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5435program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5436respectively.
5437
5438@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5439@item synthesizing instructions
5440@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5441@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5442sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5443page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5444(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5445@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5446top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5447
5448@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5449@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5450biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5451which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5452page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5453(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5454@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5455the top page of memory).
5456
5457@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5458@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
545932 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5460changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5461(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5462@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5463the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5464@end table
5465
5466@ifclear GENERIC
5467@lowersections
5468@end ifclear
5469@end ifset
5470
36f63dca 5471@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5472@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5473@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5474@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5475@node Renesas
5476@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5477
c2dcd04e
NC
5478@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5479H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5480options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
5481@end ifset
5482@end ifclear
5483
5484@ifset I960
5485@ifclear GENERIC
5486@raisesections
5487@end ifclear
5488
5489@node i960
5490@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
5491
5492@cindex i960 support
5493
5494You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
5495specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
5496family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
5497incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
5498linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
5499libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
5500search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
5501
5502For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
5503well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
5504paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
5505the names
5506
5507@smallexample
5508@group
5509try
5510libtry.a
5511tryca
5512libtryca.a
5513@end group
5514@end smallexample
5515
5516@noindent
5517The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
5518two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
5519
5520You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
5521the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
5522use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
5523specifies a library.
5524
5525@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
5526@cindex relaxing on i960
5527@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
5528you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
5529@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
5530them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
5531instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
5532instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
5533target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
5534not itself call any subroutines).
5535
5536@ifclear GENERIC
5537@lowersections
5538@end ifclear
5539@end ifset
5540
5541@ifset ARM
5542@ifclear GENERIC
5543@raisesections
5544@end ifclear
5545
93fd0973
SC
5546@ifset M68HC11
5547@ifclear GENERIC
5548@raisesections
5549@end ifclear
5550
5551@node M68HC11/68HC12
5552@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5553
5554@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
5555
5556@subsection Linker Relaxation
5557
5558For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
5559optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5560
5561@table @emph
5562@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
5563@item relaxing address modes
5564@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
5565targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5566program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5567respectively.
5568
5569@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
5570transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
5571page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
5572
5573@item relaxing gcc instruction group
5574When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
5575of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
5576addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
5577@code{bset} instructions.
5578
5579@end table
5580
5581@subsection Trampoline Generation
5582
5583@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
5584@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
5585For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
5586call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 5587will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
5588trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
5589case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
5590point to the function trampoline.
5591
5592@ifclear GENERIC
5593@lowersections
5594@end ifclear
5595@end ifset
5596
36f63dca 5597@node ARM
3674e28a 5598@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
5599
5600@cindex ARM interworking support
5601@kindex --support-old-code
5602For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 5603between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
5604been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
5605line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
5606libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
5607option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
5608given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
5609which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
5610the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
5611non-interworking aware Thumb code.
5612
5613@cindex thumb entry point
5614@cindex entry point, thumb
5615@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
5616The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
5617@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
5618But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
5619branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
5620executing in Thumb mode straight away.
5621
e489d0ae
PB
5622@cindex BE8
5623@kindex --be8
5624The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
5625executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
5626The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
5627
3674e28a
PB
5628@cindex TARGET1
5629@kindex --target1-rel
5630@kindex --target1-abs
5631The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
5632@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
5633or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
5634and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
5635
5636@cindex TARGET2
5637@kindex --target2=@var{type}
5638The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
5639@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
5640meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
5641@table @samp
5642@item rel
eeac373a
PB
5643@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
5644@item abs
5645@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
5646@item got-rel
5647@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
5648@end table
5649
319850b4
JB
5650@cindex FIX_V4BX
5651@kindex --fix-v4bx
5652The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
5653specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
5654interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
5655also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
5656
5657In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
5658linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
5659@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
5660
5661In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5662relocations are ignored.
5663
845b51d6
PB
5664@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
5665@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
5666Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
5667relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
5668
5669@smallexample
5670TST rM, #1
5671MOVEQ PC, rM
5672BX Rn
5673@end smallexample
5674
5675This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
5676and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
5677condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
5678
33bfe774
JB
5679@cindex USE_BLX
5680@kindex --use-blx
5681The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
5682BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
5683situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
5684code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
5685each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
5686
5687This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
5688specify it if you are using that target.
5689
c6dd86c6
JB
5690@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
5691@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
5692The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
5693bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
5694instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
5695to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
5696the support code can read the intended values.
5697
5698The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
5699intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
5700and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
5701intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
5702full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
5703you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
5704
5705If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
5706enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
5707@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
5708mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
5709vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
5710@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
5711
5712If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
5713potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
5714such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
5715first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
5716instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
5717the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
5718are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
5719
bf21ed78
MS
5720@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
5721@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 5722The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
5723warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5724enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5725linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
5726using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
5727not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
5728
5729@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
5730@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
5731The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
5732warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
5733@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
5734linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
5735using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 5736
726150b7
NC
5737@cindex PIC_VENEER
5738@kindex --pic-veneer
5739The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
5740ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
5741is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
5742@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
5743
5744@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
5745@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5746The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
5747code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
5748perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
5749placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
5750controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
5751The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
5752duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
5753group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
5754code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
5755where they should be placed.
5756
5757The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
5758@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
5759placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed before the first
5760branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
5761placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
5762value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
5763exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
5764A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
5765linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
5766from the input sections.
5767
5768The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
5769@samp{N = +1}.
5770
1a51c1a4
NC
5771Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
5772only, because it relies on object files properties not present
5773otherwise.
5774
36f63dca
NC
5775@ifclear GENERIC
5776@lowersections
5777@end ifclear
5778@end ifset
5779
5780@ifset HPPA
5781@ifclear GENERIC
5782@raisesections
5783@end ifclear
5784
5785@node HPPA ELF32
5786@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
5787@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
5788@kindex --multi-subspace
5789When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
5790import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
5791The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
5792stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
5793multiple sub-spaces.
5794
5795@cindex HPPA stub grouping
5796@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
5797Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
5798stub sections located between groups of input sections.
5799@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
5800sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
5801a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
5802the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
5803conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
5804prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
5805A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
5806branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
5807@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
5808@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
5809detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
5810positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
5811
5812Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
5813single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
5814create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
5815large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
5816
5817@ifclear GENERIC
5818@lowersections
5819@end ifclear
5820@end ifset
5821
7fb9f789
NC
5822@ifset M68K
5823@ifclear GENERIC
5824@raisesections
5825@end ifclear
5826
5827@node M68K
5828@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5829
5830@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
5831@kindex --got=@var{type}
5832The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
5833The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
5834@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
5835the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
5836@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
5837entries only at non-negative offsets.
5838@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
5839entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
5840support such GOTs.
5841@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
5842output file. All GOT references from a single input object
5843file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
5844files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
5845
5846@ifclear GENERIC
5847@lowersections
5848@end ifclear
5849@end ifset
5850
36f63dca
NC
5851@ifset MMIX
5852@ifclear GENERIC
5853@raisesections
5854@end ifclear
5855
5856@node MMIX
5857@section @code{ld} and MMIX
5858For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
5859@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
5860understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
5861can translate between the two formats.
5862
5863There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
5864Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
5865registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
5866equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
5867@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
5868global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
5869this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
5870symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
5871
7a2de473
HPN
5872Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
5873@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
5874The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
5875of a section.
36f63dca
NC
5876
5877Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
5878are left out from an mmo file.
5879
5880@ifclear GENERIC
5881@lowersections
5882@end ifclear
5883@end ifset
5884
5885@ifset MSP430
5886@ifclear GENERIC
5887@raisesections
5888@end ifclear
5889
5890@node MSP430
5891@section @code{ld} and MSP430
5892For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
5893will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
5894just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
5895
5896@cindex MSP430 extra sections
5897The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
5898
5899@table @code
5900@item @samp{.vectors}
5901Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
5902
5903@item @samp{.bootloader}
5904Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
5905in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5906
5907@item @samp{.infomem}
5908Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
5909this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
5910
c0065db7 5911@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
5912This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
5913in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
5914
5915@item @samp{.noinit}
5916Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
5917
c0065db7 5918The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
5919@end table
5920
5921@ifclear GENERIC
5922@lowersections
5923@end ifclear
5924@end ifset
5925
2a60a7a8
AM
5926@ifset POWERPC
5927@ifclear GENERIC
5928@raisesections
5929@end ifclear
5930
5931@node PowerPC ELF32
5932@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5933@cindex PowerPC long branches
5934@kindex --relax on PowerPC
5935Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
5936displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
5937@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
5938@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
5939the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
5940section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
5941section exceeds 33M in size.
5942
5943@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
5944@table @option
5945@cindex PowerPC PLT
5946@kindex --bss-plt
5947@item --bss-plt
5948Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
5949generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
5950the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
5951writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
5952@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
5953PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
5954compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
5955BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
5956
016687f8
AM
5957@kindex --secure-plt
5958@item --secure-plt
5959@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
5960@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
5961when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
5962layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
5963style BSS PLT.
5964
2a60a7a8
AM
5965@cindex PowerPC GOT
5966@kindex --sdata-got
5967@item --sdata-got
5968The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
5969sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
5970@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
5971section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
5972@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
5973@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
5974@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
5975@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
5976PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
5977pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
5978GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
5979really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
5980
5981@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
5982@kindex --emit-stub-syms
5983@item --emit-stub-syms
5984This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
5985symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
5986
5987@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
5988@kindex --no-tls-optimize
5989@item --no-tls-optimize
5990PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
5991sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
5992disable the optimization.
5993@end table
5994
5995@ifclear GENERIC
5996@lowersections
5997@end ifclear
5998@end ifset
5999
6000@ifset POWERPC64
6001@ifclear GENERIC
6002@raisesections
6003@end ifclear
6004
6005@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6006@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6007
6008@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6009@table @option
6010@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6011@kindex --stub-group-size
6012@item --stub-group-size
6013Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6014by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6015@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6016sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6017a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6018the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6019conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6020prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6021A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6022branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6023@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6024@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6025detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6026positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6027
6028Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6029single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6030create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6031large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6032
6033@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6034@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6035@item --emit-stub-syms
6036This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6037symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6038
6039@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6040@kindex --dotsyms
6041@kindex --no-dotsyms
6042@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6043These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6044in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6045function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6046code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6047properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6048to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6049@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6050dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6051feature.
6052
6053@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6054@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6055@item --no-tls-optimize
6056PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6057sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6058disable the optimization.
6059
6060@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6061@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6062@item --no-opd-optimize
6063PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6064corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6065the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6066Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6067
6068@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6069@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6070@item --non-overlapping-opd
6071Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6072@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6073the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6074entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6075
6076@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6077@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6078@item --no-toc-optimize
6079PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6080entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6081reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6082marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6083marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6084relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6085unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6086reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6087discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6088reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6089code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6090optimization.
6091
6092@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6093@kindex --no-multi-toc
6094@item --no-multi-toc
6095By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6096entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6097total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6098grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6099TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6100calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6101help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
610264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6103Use this option to turn off this feature.
6104@end table
6105
6106@ifclear GENERIC
6107@lowersections
6108@end ifclear
6109@end ifset
6110
49fa1e15
AM
6111@ifset SPU
6112@ifclear GENERIC
6113@raisesections
6114@end ifclear
6115
6116@node SPU ELF
6117@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6118
6119@cindex SPU ELF options
6120@table @option
6121
6122@cindex SPU plugins
6123@kindex --plugin
6124@item --plugin
6125This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6126
6127@cindex SPU overlays
6128@kindex --no-overlays
6129@item --no-overlays
6130Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6131regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6132@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6133turns off all this special overlay handling.
6134
6135@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6136@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6137@item --emit-stub-syms
6138This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6139symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6140
6141@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6142@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6143@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6144This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6145function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6146on calls to non-overlay regions.
6147
6148@cindex SPU local store size
6149@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6150@item --local-store=lo:hi
6151@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6152the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6153range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6154
c0065db7 6155@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6156@kindex --stack-analysis
6157@item --stack-analysis
6158SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6159unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6160under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6161@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6162@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6163determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6164for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6165for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6166for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6167find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6168and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6169under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6170dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6171is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6172and calls will be given.
6173
c0065db7 6174@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6175@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6176@item --emit-stack-syms
6177This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6178in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6179These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6180functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6181functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6182such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6183The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6184@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6185@end table
6186
6187@ifclear GENERIC
6188@lowersections
6189@end ifclear
6190@end ifset
6191
36f63dca
NC
6192@ifset TICOFF
6193@ifclear GENERIC
6194@raisesections
6195@end ifclear
6196
6197@node TI COFF
6198@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6199@cindex TI COFF versions
6200@kindex --format=@var{version}
6201The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6202TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6203also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6204format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6205header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6206
6207@ifclear GENERIC
6208@lowersections
6209@end ifclear
6210@end ifset
6211
2ca22b03
NC
6212@ifset WIN32
6213@ifclear GENERIC
6214@raisesections
6215@end ifclear
6216
6217@node WIN32
6218@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6219
c0065db7 6220This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6221See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6222command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6223
6224@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6225@cindex import libraries
6226@item import libraries
69da35b5 6227The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6228libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6229regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6230archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6231support for creating such libraries provided with the
6232@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6233
c0065db7
RM
6234@item exporting DLL symbols
6235@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6236The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6237
6238@table @emph
6239@item using auto-export functionality
6240@cindex using auto-export functionality
6241By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6242which is controlled by the following command line options:
6243
0a5d968e
NC
6244@itemize
6245@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6246@item --exclude-symbols
6247@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6248@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
0a5d968e
NC
6249@end itemize
6250
c0065db7 6251If, however, @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6252command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6253if either of the following are true:
6254
6255@itemize
6256@item A DEF file is used.
6257@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6258@end itemize
dc8465bf 6259
c0065db7
RM
6260@item using a DEF file
6261@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6262Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6263an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6264exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6265name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6266command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6267
6268@example
6269gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6270@end example
6271
0a5d968e
NC
6272Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6273@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6274
dc8465bf
NC
6275Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6276
6277@example
4b5bd4e7 6278LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6279
6280EXPORTS
6281foo
6282bar
6283_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6284another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6285var1 DATA
c0065db7 6286@end example
dc8465bf 6287
4b5bd4e7
DS
6288This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and five
6289symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6290alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6291by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6292@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
6293@code{var1} is declared to be a data object.
6294
6b31ad16
DS
6295The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6296name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6297the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6298
b45619c0
NC
6299When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6300library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6301@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6302executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6303
6304With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6305specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6306non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6307
6308If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6309or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6310filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6311
4b5bd4e7
DS
6312The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6313
6314@example
6315EXPORTS
6316 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6317 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
6318 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] ) *
c0065db7 6319@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6320
6321Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6322@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6323@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6324@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6325Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
6326@samp{<integer>} alias.
6327
6328The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6329
6330@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6331will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6332by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6333linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6334library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6335
6336@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6337The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6338the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6339@code{*_imp__foo}).
6340
6341@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6342well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6343read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6344variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6345the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6346extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6347application will behave unexpectedly.
6348
6349@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6350it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6351symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6352API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6353the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6354
4b5bd4e7
DS
6355See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6356other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6357
6358@cindex creating a DEF file
6359While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6360with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6361
6362@item Using decorations
6363@cindex Using decorations
6364Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6365itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6366declared as:
6367
6368@example
6369__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6370__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6371@end example
6372
6373All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6374any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6375this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6376the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6377
6378Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6379decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6380instead:
6381
6382@example
6383__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6384__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6385@end example
6386
c0065db7
RM
6387This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6388when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6389variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6390code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6391of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6392omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6393@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6394information.
c0065db7 6395@end table
dc8465bf 6396
2ca22b03
NC
6397@cindex automatic data imports
6398@item automatic data imports
6399The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6400by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6401compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6402issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6403code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6404c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6405initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6406decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6407platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6408command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6409The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6410suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6411trigger the feature's use.
6412
c0065db7 6413auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6414additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6415
c0065db7 6416"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6417documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6418
c0065db7
RM
6419The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6420occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6421One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6422below.
6423
6424@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6425For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6426object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6427offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6428field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6429in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6430without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6431The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6432references.
6433
c0065db7
RM
6434The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6435be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6436themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6437runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6438compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6439support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6440run without error on an older system.
6441
c0065db7
RM
6442@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6443enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
6444
6445@cindex direct linking to a dll
6446@item direct linking to a dll
6447The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
6448including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 6449libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 6450traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
6451libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
6452function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
6453though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 6454storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 6455tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
6456large or complex libraries when using import libs.
6457
c0065db7 6458Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 6459@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 6460of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
6461perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
6462select the dll instead of an import library.
6463
2ca22b03 6464
69da35b5
NC
6465For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
6466to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
6467
6468@example
45e948fe
NC
6469libxxx.dll.a
6470xxx.dll.a
6471libxxx.a
6472xxx.lib
69da35b5 6473cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
6474libxxx.dll
6475xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
6476@end example
6477
69da35b5
NC
6478before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
6479
c0065db7
RM
6480(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
6481where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
6482@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
6483file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
6484@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
6485
c0065db7
RM
6486Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
6487@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
6488was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
6489various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
6490could coexist on the same machine.
6491
2ca22b03
NC
6492The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
6493applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 6494libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
6495
6496@example
6497bin/
6498 cygxxx.dll
6499lib/
6500 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 6501 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
6502@end example
6503
c0065db7
RM
6504Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
6505done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
6506
65071. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
6508@example
6509gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6510@end example
2ca22b03 6511
69da35b5
NC
6512However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
6513(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
6514@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
6515not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
6516
2ca22b03
NC
65172. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
6518directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
6519should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
6520making the app/dll.
6521
6522@example
6523ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 6524@end example
2ca22b03
NC
6525
6526Then you can link without any make environment changes.
6527
6528@example
6529gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 6530@end example
69da35b5
NC
6531
6532This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
6533perfectly legal
6534
6535@example
6536bin/
6537 cygxxx-5.dll
6538lib/
c0065db7 6539 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
6540@end example
6541
dc8465bf 6542Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
6543even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
6544@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
6545
6546Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 6547wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
6548
65491. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
6550work with auto-imported data.
6551
dc8465bf
NC
65522. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
6553import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
6554symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
6555for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
6556possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 6557
45e948fe
NC
65583. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
6559critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
6560in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
6561stdcall-decorated assembly names.
6562
69da35b5 6563So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
6564true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
6565a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
6566binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
6567massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
6568requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
6569will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 6570
c0065db7 6571@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 6572@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6573@item adding additional names
6574Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
6575A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
6576exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
6577when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 6578import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 6579
c0065db7 6580@example
dc8465bf
NC
6581LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6582
6583EXPORTS
c0065db7 6584foo
dc8465bf 6585_foo = foo
c0065db7 6586@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6587
6588The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
6589
6590Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
6591source code using the "weak" attribute:
6592
c0065db7
RM
6593@example
6594void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 6595void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 6596@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6597
6598See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
6599symbols.
6600
6601@item renaming symbols
6602Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 6603kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
6604@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
6605DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 6606created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 6607
c0065db7 6608@example
dc8465bf
NC
6609LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
6610
6611EXPORTS
6612_foo = foo
c0065db7 6613@end example
dc8465bf
NC
6614
6615The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
6616@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 6617@end table
dc8465bf 6618
0a5d968e 6619Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 6620unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 6621If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
6622@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
6623that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
6624@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
6625renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
6626to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
6627the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
6628In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 6629which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
6630
6631@cindex weak externals
6632@item weak externals
6633The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
6634weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
6635defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
6636are three variants of weak externals:
6637@itemize
6638@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
6639called lazy externals.
6640@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
6641This form is not presently implemented.
6642@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
6643implemented.
6644@end itemize
6645As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
6646are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
6647uses a default value.
2ca22b03
NC
6648@end table
6649
6650@ifclear GENERIC
6651@lowersections
6652@end ifclear
6653@end ifset
6654
e0001a05
NC
6655@ifset XTENSA
6656@ifclear GENERIC
6657@raisesections
6658@end ifclear
6659
6660@node Xtensa
6661@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6662
6663@cindex Xtensa processors
6664The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
6665@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
6666specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
6667keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
6668example, with the command:
6669
6670@smallexample
6671SECTIONS
6672@{
6673 .text : @{
6674 *(.literal .text)
6675 @}
6676@}
6677@end smallexample
6678
6679@noindent
6680@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
6681and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
6682literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
6683interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
6684group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
6685files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
6686and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 6687
43cd72b9 6688@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 6689@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
6690Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
6691provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
6692is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
6693literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
6694will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
6695location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
6696the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
6697unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
6698@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
6699range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
6700
6701For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
6702to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
6703instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
6704instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
6705instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
6706@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
6707hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
6708By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
6709switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
6710density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
6711instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
6712performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
6713linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
6714a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
6715
6716The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
6717control the linker:
6718
6719@cindex Xtensa options
6720@table @option
e0001a05 6721@kindex --no-relax
43cd72b9
BW
6722@item --no-relax
6723Since the Xtensa version of @code{ld} enables the @option{--relax} option
6724by default, the @option{--no-relax} option is provided to disable
6725relaxation.
6726
6727@item --size-opt
6728When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
6729more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
6730no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
6731alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
6732preserve the correctness of the code.
6733@end table
e0001a05
NC
6734
6735@ifclear GENERIC
6736@lowersections
6737@end ifclear
6738@end ifset
6739
252b5132
RH
6740@ifclear SingleFormat
6741@node BFD
6742@chapter BFD
6743
6744@cindex back end
6745@cindex object file management
6746@cindex object formats available
6747@kindex objdump -i
6748The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
6749These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
6750object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
6751format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
6752it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
6753associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
6754object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
6755(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
6756list all the formats available for your configuration.
6757
6758@cindex BFD requirements
6759@cindex requirements for BFD
6760As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
6761several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
6762BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
6763formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
6764been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
6765BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
6766may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
6767
6768One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
6769mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
6770useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
6771conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
6772
6773@menu
6774* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
6775@end menu
6776
6777@node BFD outline
36f63dca 6778@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
6779@cindex opening object files
6780@include bfdsumm.texi
6781@end ifclear
6782
6783@node Reporting Bugs
6784@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
6785@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
6786@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 6787
ff5dcc92 6788Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
6789
6790Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
6791it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 6792to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 6793work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 6794@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6795
6796In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
6797information that enables us to fix the bug.
6798
6799@menu
6800* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
6801* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
6802@end menu
6803
6804@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 6805@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
6806@cindex bug criteria
6807
6808If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
6809
6810@itemize @bullet
6811@cindex fatal signal
6812@cindex linker crash
6813@cindex crash of linker
6814@item
6815If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 6816@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
6817
6818@cindex error on valid input
6819@item
ff5dcc92 6820If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
6821
6822@cindex invalid input
6823@item
ff5dcc92 6824If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
6825may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
6826object files are correct.
6827
6828@item
6829If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 6830improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
6831@end itemize
6832
6833@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 6834@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 6835@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 6836@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
6837
6838A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 6839products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
6840recommend you contact that organization first.
6841
6842You can find contact information for many support companies and
6843individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
6844distribution.
6845
ad22bfe8 6846@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 6847Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
6848@value{BUGURL}.
6849@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6850
6851The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
6852@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
6853fact or leave it out, state it!
6854
6855Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
6856problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
6857assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
6858matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
6859the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
6860location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
6861were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
6862into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
6863specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 6864and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
6865
6866Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
6867the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
6868on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
6869
6870Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
6871bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
6872respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
6873You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
6874
6875To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
6876
6877@itemize @bullet
6878@item
ff5dcc92 6879The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
6880the @samp{--version} argument.
6881
6882Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 6883the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
6884
6885@item
ff5dcc92 6886Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
6887patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
6888
6889@item
6890The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
6891version number.
6892
6893@item
ff5dcc92 6894What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
6895``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
6896
6897@item
6898The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
6899observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
6900list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
6901sufficient.
6902
6903If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
6904and then we might not encounter the bug.
6905
6906@item
6907A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
6908bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
6909provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
6910bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
6911state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
6912requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
6913we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
6914attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
6915
6916If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
6917@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
6918object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
6919@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
6920how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
6921
6922@item
6923A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
6924incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
6925
ff5dcc92 6926Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
6927will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
6928not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
6929a chance to make a mistake.
6930
6931Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
6932say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 6933copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
6934C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
6935and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
6936fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
6937you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
6938any conclusion from our observations.
6939
6940@item
ff5dcc92 6941If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
6942diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
6943@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 6944If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
6945context, not by line number.
6946
6947The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
6948sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
6949@end itemize
6950
6951Here are some things that are not necessary:
6952
6953@itemize @bullet
6954@item
6955A description of the envelope of the bug.
6956
6957Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
6958which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
6959changes will not affect it.
6960
6961This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
6962will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
6963with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
6964We recommend that you save your time for something else.
6965
6966Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
6967of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
6968output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
6969less time, and so on.
6970
6971However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
6972report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
6973
6974@item
6975A patch for the bug.
6976
6977A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
6978the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
6979a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
6980to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
6981
ff5dcc92 6982Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
6983construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
6984through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
6985able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
6986fixed.
6987
6988And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
6989patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
6990help us to understand.
6991
6992@item
6993A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
6994
6995Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
6996things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
6997@end itemize
6998
6999@node MRI
7000@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7001@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7002To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7003linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7004alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7005described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7006simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7007@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7008linker commands; these commands are described here.
7009
7010In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7011file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7012features to make use of them.
7013
7014You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7015@samp{-c} command-line option.
7016
7017Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7018command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7019blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7020MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7021issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7022
7023Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7024
7025You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7026lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7027The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7028
7029@table @code
7030@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7031@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7032@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7033Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7034the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7035@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7036your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7037script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7038commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7039input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7040@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7041
7042@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7043@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7044Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7045in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7046
7047@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7048
7049@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7050@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7051Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7052@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7053
7054@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7055@item BASE @var{expression}
7056Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7057absolute addresses) in the output file.
7058
7059@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7060@item CHIP @var{expression}
7061@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7062This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7063
7064@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7065@item END
7066This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7067
7068@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7069@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7070Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7071language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7072
7073@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7074@item
252b5132
RH
7075S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7076
7077@item
7078IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7079
7080@item
7081COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7082@samp{COFF}
7083@end enumerate
7084
7085@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7086@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7087Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7088@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7089
7090The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7091same line, with no change in its effect.
7092
7093@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7094@item LOAD @var{filename}
7095@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7096Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7097same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7098command line.
7099
7100@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7101@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7102@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7103MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7104option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7105
7106@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7107@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7108@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7109Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7110order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7111script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7112sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7113file, in the order specified.
7114
7115@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7116@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7117@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7118@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7119Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7120@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7121
7122@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7123@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7124@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7125@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7126You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7127specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7128If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7129@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7130@end table
7131
793c5807
NC
7132@node GNU Free Documentation License
7133@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7134@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7135
370b66a1
CD
7136@node LD Index
7137@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7138
7139@printindex cp
7140
7141@tex
7142% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7143% meantime:
7144\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7145\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7146\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7147\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7148\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7149\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7150\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7151\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7152\page\colophon
7153% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7154@end tex
7155
252b5132 7156@bye
This page took 0.934115 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.